JP6856873B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a ball-type gaming machine (also referred to as a "pachinko gaming machine", a "pachinko machine", etc.), a rotating drum-type gaming machine (also referred to as a "slot machine", a "pachislot machine", etc.), etc. It is about a game machine.

Conventionally, a game machine is configured to include operating means for game progress operated by a player, such as a handle for launching a game ball into a game area and a stop button for stopping a reel. Further, for the purpose of enhancing the game interest of the player, a gaming machine provided with an operating means for directing (for example, a directing button) in addition to the operating means for advancing the game is also known. In general, such a game machine has an operation effect function of performing a predetermined effect based on the operation means for the effect being operated by the player during the operation effective period such as during a symbol change.

Then, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that notifies the operation validity period of the effect operation means (effect operation means) by light emission. In the case of the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, the operation of the light emitting means for notifying the advance notice for notifying the lottery result related to the game in advance and the externally operable operating means for the effect is effective. The light emitting means for notifying the valid period for notifying that the valid period is in effect is composed of a common light emitting means (for example, a rotating light), and the common light emitting means is arranged in the vicinity of the effect operating means to notify the notification. By emitting light in different light emission modes depending on the application, the player can easily distinguish between the notice notification and the notification of the operation validity period. Specifically, when notifying the advance notice, the rotating lamp is made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which the LED is continuously lit while rotating the reflector, and when notifying the operation effective period, the reflector is not rotated. It is exemplified that a rotating lamp is made to emit light in a light emitting mode in which an LED is blinked.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-087640

However, the method of notifying the operation validity period by the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 only notifies that the operation is valid, and cannot perform various notifications regarding the operation validity period. .. For example, it is not possible to notify the entire operation validity period, such as how long the overall operation validity period is or how long the remaining operation validity period is, so that the player can operate with a margin. There was a problem in drawing out the playability of the operation production, such as not being able to enjoy the production.

Here, as a method for solving the above problem, it is conceivable to notify the operation validity period on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device that displays the variation of the decorative pattern. In this case, since the liquid crystal display device can display a dynamic image, it is easy to display the entire operation valid period and the remaining operation valid period. In addition, various production modes can be derived for the instruction of the operation content and the teaching of the operation result. However, the game machine is not always configured to include a liquid crystal display device. In addition, even if a liquid crystal display device is provided, it is assumed that it will be difficult to notify the operation validity period when the liquid crystal display device breaks down or when an accessory is operating on the front surface of the liquid crystal screen. The liquid crystal.

As described above, in the conventional game machine, there is a problem to be improved regarding the notification of the operation validity period to the operation means for production.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned problems, the present invention is a game in which the operation effective period of the operation means for production can be notified in a manner that the player can easily recognize without using a dynamic image display means such as a liquid crystal display device. The purpose is to provide an opportunity.

In order to solve such a problem, in the present invention, the lighting is controlled by the main control means for controlling the progress of the game, the effect control means for executing the effect according to the progress of the game by the main control means, and the effect control means. A light emitting effect device, a speaker that executes a sound effect controlled by the effect control means, and an effect input device that inputs input information to the effect control means based on an input operation by the player. A game machine is provided. In the game machine, the effect control means can execute a player operation input effect that can change the effect mode being executed based on the input of the input information by the effect input device, and the player operation input. The effect period includes an introduction effect period for prompting the input operation to the effect input device, an input valid notification period for notifying that the input operation for the effect input device is valid, and the effect input device for the effect input device. When the input operation satisfies a predetermined input condition, the post-operation effect period for notifying the benefit given to the player in the game executed by the main control means or the degree of expectation for the benefit is given. included. Further, in the present game machine, the player operation input effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns in which the player's input operation mode for the effect input device is different, which is a condition that can change the effect mode being executed. A game for the effect input device defined as a condition in which the effect control means can change the effect pattern of the player operation input effect during the input valid notification period of the player operation input effect. The light emitting effect is executed by the light emitting effect device according to the input operation mode of the person, and the player operation input effect is a case where the player's input operation to the effect input device is not performed during the input valid notification period. However, the profit given to the player or the profit in the game executed by the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined conditions corresponding to the effect pattern of the player operation input effect. It is possible to set an automatic operation function that shifts to the post-operation effect period for notifying the degree of expectation to be given, and even when the automatic operation function is effectively set in the player operation input effect. An effective period during which the player's input operation to the effect input device is valid is set in the input valid notification period, and the light emitting effect device sets the effect pattern of the player operation input effect during the input valid notification period. A light emitting effect is performed according to the player's input operation mode to the effect input device defined as a condition that can change the effect mode during execution, and the automatic operation function is effectively set in the player operation input effect. If so, the execution mode of the voice effect executed by the speaker is different from the case where the automatic operation function is disabled in at least either the introduction effect period or the input valid notification period. On the other hand, the execution mode of the light emission effect executed by the light emission effect device and the voice effect executed by the speaker during the post-operation effect period is the same as when the automatic operation function is disabled. It is configured to be characterized Rukoto.

According to the present invention, it is possible to notify the operation validity period of the operation means for production in a manner that the player can easily recognize.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the rear. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a state where the glass frame is opened from the front frame and the front frame is opened from the outer frame, as viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a glass frame, a game board, a front frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the rear. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a perspective view which looked at the back of the game board from the left rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the back of the game board from the right rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a rear view (part 1) of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view (2) of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view (3) of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which has a board surface structure suitable for this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating display mode of a symbol display area. It is a figure which shows the arrangement and the design of a reel. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an icon which can be displayed by a sub-effect display device. It is an enlarged view around the expectation degree display LED. It is a control block diagram which shows the electric structure example of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the function of the main control board shown in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the function of the effect control board shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol winning / failing lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol table per special symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol variation pattern table for hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol variation pattern table for detachment. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern look-ahead determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side main processing following FIG. 32. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side main processing following FIG. 33. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing of a main control side. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of continuous main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start port monitoring control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start port monitoring control processing following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol change start monitoring process shown in FIG. 41. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol change start monitoring processing following FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control general-purpose processing shown in FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 45. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during special symbol change shown in FIG. 45. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during special symbol stop symbol display shown in FIG. 45. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during special symbol stop symbol display following FIG. 48. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during special symbol stop symbol display following FIG. 49. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special electric accessory control process following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special electric accessory control process following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing on the production control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing shown in FIG. 55. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect state transition process shown in FIG. 56. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation effect content determination process shown in FIG. 56. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit effect content determination process shown in FIG. 56. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit effect content determination process following FIG. 59. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of image control command transmission interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display content of the production display device in a roulette reach production. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display content of the effect display device in the roulette reach effect of a standard pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display content of the production display device in the roulette reach production of a chance pattern. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display content of the production display device in the roulette reach production of an intense heat pattern. It is a chart which provides the explanation of the stop form of the reel re-stop for each development pattern in the roulette reach production. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display content of the production display device in the 7-reach production with one reach line. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display content of the production display device in the two reach productions of a reach line. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display content of the production display device in a vision chance production. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the claw rotation step-up notice production. This is a timing chart used to explain the claw rotation step-up notice effect. It is a figure which shows the flow of the pre-reading target hold expectation degree suggestion effect of the effect pattern B. It is a figure which shows the flow of the pre-reading target hold expectation degree suggestion effect of the effect pattern A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a player operation input effect (normal pattern) of a single push. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the seg display. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of a seg display in an operation input effect. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a player operation input effect (chance pattern) of a single push. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a player operation input effect of a continuous hit. It is a figure for demonstrating a specific example of a seg display in a continuous hit challenge. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a player operation input effect of long press. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a player operation input effect of a single push when automatic operation is enabled.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Structure of pachinko machine>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Further, from FIG. 2 onward, the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is shown as viewed from another direction, disassembled, and the like. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the front, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in a state where the glass frame is opened from the front frame and the front frame is opened from the outer frame, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the glass frame, the game board, and the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the frame and the outer frame from the front, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the glass frame, the game board, the front frame, and the outer frame from the rear. Is.

The pachinko machine 1 supports the frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the glass frame (door frame) 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable, and the glass frame 3 that can be opened and closed. A gaming board having a front frame 4 that is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and a gaming area 5a that is detachably attached to the front frame 4 from the front and is visible through the glass frame 3 and into which a gaming ball is hit. 5 and.

The outer frame 2 has a square shape that is a combination of frames 2a and 2b extending vertically and horizontally and frames 2c and 2d extending vertically and horizontally, and includes hinge members 2e and 2f above and below the left edge from the front. The hinge member supports the front frame 4 and the glass frame 3 so as to be openable and closably open and detachable.

A glass frame 3 is attached to the front surface side of the front frame 4 so as to be openable / closable and detachable by laterally opening and closing by hinge mechanisms 3a and 3b at the left edge when facing the front. The glass frame 3 is held in a closed state by a glass plate covering the front surface thereof by using the locking device 3c. A game board 5 is detachably attached to the upper half of the front frame 4 located behind the glass frame 3 from the front side of the front frame 4, and the glass frame 3 is closed and held as described above. The game area 5a in front of the game board 5 can be visually recognized through the layered glass.

The glass frame 3 is a quadrangular base unit 3e having a through hole 3d penetrating the front and rear, a dish unit 3f for storing game balls in the lower front surface thereof, and a game board 5 for storing game balls in the dish unit 3f. It is provided with an area 3g for accommodating a handle 4a that can be operated by a player to drive into the game area of the above. On the front side of the glass frame 3, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 3h that emits light according to the progress of the game and a speaker 3i that outputs sound according to the progress of the game are provided. At the center of the front of the plate unit 3f, an effect button 3j that is pressed and operated by the player is provided. Further, the base of the effect button 3j has a lever structure that can be tilted to a predetermined angle toward the front side (player side), and functions as a second effect button 3k that is pulled and operated by the player. The second effect button 3k may have a structure that allows a pulling operation at all times, but in consideration of the operability of the effect button 3j, it is usually fixed to the OFF side by a lock mechanism or the like, and when a specific effect is executed. It is preferable that the lock is released to enable the pulling operation (ON operation).

The front frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and has a frame body 4b that supports the outer periphery of the game board 5, hinges of the outer frame 2 on the upper and lower sides of the left side of the frame body 4b when viewed from the front, and a door frame 3. Hinge 4c, 4d to which the hinges of the above are rotatably attached, a ball launching device 4e, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the frame body 4b and for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the frame body. A locking unit 4f that is attached to the right side surface of the front view of 4b and locks between the outer frame 2, the front frame 4, and the glass frame 3, and a substrate unit 4g that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the frame body 4b. And a back cover 4h that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame body 4b on the rear side of the frame body 4b. The board unit 4g houses a speaker unit, a power supply board, an interface control board, and a payout control board that controls payout of game balls.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the launching device 4a of the game ball, the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strength corresponding to the angle. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening (entry ball opening), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the received winning opening. By paying out the game ball, the player's interest can be enhanced.

<Game board>
Next, the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 14. 8 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front right, FIG. 10 is a rear view of the game board, FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the back of the game board as viewed from the left rear, and FIG. A perspective view of the back of the game board viewed from the rear right, FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration, and FIG. 14 is a disassembled rear view of the game board for each main configuration. It is an exploded perspective view seen from.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit. The game board 5 is configured by combining a front unit 100 m, a back unit 200 m, a liquid crystal base 300 m, and a liquid crystal display device (effect display device) 70. The front unit 100m has a front member 100a that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a plate-shaped unit that is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. A game panel 100b is provided, and a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined arrangement in a place within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 100b.

The front member 100a includes a function display unit 100c in the lower right corner that makes the game status visible to the player based on a control signal from the main control unit 5b (main control board 100 that controls the entire game). The liquid crystal display device 70 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a and displays a predetermined effect image. A peripheral control unit 5c (effect control board 200 that controls the overall effect) is attached to the back surface of the liquid crystal display device 70. The back unit 200m side of the liquid crystal base 300m is opened to accommodate the back unit 200m, and the liquid crystal display device 70 is attached to the back surface of the liquid crystal base 300m.

The game panel 100b has a shape of the outer periphery substantially the same as that of the front member 100a, is made of a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate, is attached to the rear side of the front member 100a, and further includes a holder to which the back unit 200m is attached to the rear surface. The front member 100a has a plurality of general winning openings 66 that are always open to accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and can accept game balls at different positions in the game area 5a from the general winning openings. A first starting port 61 that is always open, a gate 63 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball (integrated with the attacker unit 500 described later), and the game ball gate the gate. Acceptance of game balls into the second start port 62 (integrally formed with the attacker unit 500 described later) and the first start port 61, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery drawn by passing through. Depending on the result of the first special lottery drawn by the player or the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port, the game ball can be accepted at either of the large winning openings 64 (described later). It is integrally formed with the attacker unit 500). Since the gate 63, the second starting port 62, and the large winning opening 64 are inside the attacker unit 500, they are not shown here.

The second starting port is provided with a normal electric accessory composed of movable pieces and a normal electric accessory solenoid for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory. Depending on the energized state of the normal electric accessory solenoid, the ordinary electric accessory is in a closed state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port, and an open state in which the game ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. Can be changed alternately. The second starting port has a configuration in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter unless the normal electric accessory is in the open state, while it is easy for the game ball to enter when the normal electric accessory is in the open state. The front member 100a includes a first out port 29 directly below the first start port 61 at the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 500 is located at the lower right of the front member 100a. The attacker unit 500 is a unit that mainly includes a movable piece as a special electric accessory 642 that opens and closes the grand prize opening 64, and a plurality of parts are integrated in total.

The back unit 200m has an opening 200a for visually recognizing the rear liquid crystal display screen. The back unit 200m has a sensor for detecting the game ball received in the general winning opening 66, the first starting port 61, etc., a lock mechanism for detachably attaching the liquid crystal base 300m, and a passage for discharging the game ball. Be prepared.

The front member 100a has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front member 100a extends from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction in the front view, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends to the upper right diagonally. The inner rail 100d, which is arranged inside the front member 100a substantially along the 100f and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 100d in the front view. It is provided with an out taxiway 100e, which is formed at the lowest position and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

The game panel 100b includes a center decoration 22 projecting toward the front member 100a around an opening having the same shape as the opening of the front member 100a. When the game panel 100b is fixed to the front member 100a, the center decoration 22 is fitted into the opening so as to match the shape of the opening of the front member 100a, and decorates the area around the opening 100h of the front unit 100m. The player can recognize the behavior of the effect screen and the effect device through the opening 100h. The center decoration 22 is a kind of decorative body, and exerts a decorative function at the center of the game board 5 to assist the screen of the effect display device 70 and the like. The center decoration 22 may be provided with a movable accessory (movable effect device) that executes an effect operation according to the progress of the game. The movable accessory is operated by a drive source such as a stepping motor or a solenoid. The center decoration 22 may be provided with a lamp that emits light according to the progress of the game.

The main control unit 5b (see FIG. 7) is mounted on the back surface of the liquid crystal display device 70 and below the peripheral control unit 5c. The main control unit 5b includes a main control board 100 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board case 100n that houses the main control board 100 (see FIG. 16). The main control unit 5b controls the game content, the prize ball of the game ball, and the like.

The function display unit 100c has a status indicator composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and a normal symbol by blinking and controlling two LEDs based on the result of the normal symbol lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate 63. Of the normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal symbol lottery result after the variable display, and the variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate 63, the start condition of the variable display is still The first lottery was drawn by accepting a game ball to the first starting port 61 (occurrence of a starting prize) and a normal holding indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings, which is the number of variable displays for which is not established. A first special symbol display that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner by controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the special lottery result, and then displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the first special lottery result. Among the fluctuation displays of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 61, the second LED is composed of two LEDs that display the number of holdings, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. The second special symbol is controlled by blinking eight LEDs based on the result of the second special lottery drawn by the 1 special hold number indicator and the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port (occurrence of the start prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after the variable display, and a variable display of the second special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port. Of these, the second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of variable displays for which the start condition of the variable display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result are " It is provided with a round display composed of four LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening at the time of "big hit" or the like. The function display unit 100c can display the number of holds, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED.

The peripheral control unit 5c is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 70, and controls the effects (light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc.) presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board 100. A board 200 and an image control board 300 that controls image display and sound output according to game development are provided (see FIG. 24). The liquid crystal display device 70 is located in the center of the game area 5a, and is detachably attached to the rear surface of substantially the center of the liquid crystal base 300 m accommodating the back unit 200 m. The liquid crystal display device 70 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame of the frame-shaped center decoration 22 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The liquid crystal display device 70 is a full-color display device backlit by a white LED, and displays a still image or a moving image. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 are described as being divided into two boards, but the functional configuration of the CPU of each board is not limited to the above. It may be changed as appropriate (for example, the sound is controlled by the CPU of the effect control board), or the entire effect may be controlled by the CPU on one board.

The liquid crystal display device 70 mainly displays an effect image including a decorative symbol and a notice effect that are variablely displayed / stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Hold display. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display unit for executing variable display of decorative symbols, a notice effect display, and the like, and a hold of the first special symbol in synchronization with the first special symbol hold lamp. A first special figure hold display unit on which the display is executed and a second special figure hold display unit on which the hold display of the second special symbol is executed in synchronization with the second special figure hold lamp are provided.

The decorative symbol display section of the liquid crystal display screen is provided with three rows of display areas (left display area, middle display area, right display area) which are variable display areas of the decorative symbol on a predetermined effective line. The left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the left display area, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle display area, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right display area. In the normal display mode, the special figure hold display unit displays the hold image marked with a white circle when the operation hold ball of the special symbol occurs, while the corresponding hold image disappears when the action hold ball is digested. To. This hold image is displayed in a predetermined order such as the type of operation hold ball of the special symbol and the order of occurrence (entry ball order), and up to 4 pieces can be displayed on each special figure hold display unit. is there.

<Change settings>
It is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be provided with a setting changing function for changing the degree of advantage of the game to the player by setting values in a plurality of stages. Here, the set value is a value for designating the degree of advantage of the game to the player, and is managed by the main control board 100 (see FIG. 24). In this example, it is assumed that six levels of setting values of "setting 1", "setting 2", ..., "setting 5", and "setting 6" are prepared in order from the one with the lowest degree of advantage. In order to make the degree of advantage of the game to the player different depending on each set value, for example, it is conceivable to set a difference in the jackpot probability and the probability fluctuation performance of the special symbol lottery for each set value. The main control board 100 controls the progress of the game based on the set value, and when the set value is changed by the setting change operation described later, controls the progress of the game based on the changed set value.

Therefore, in the following, the features of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment when the setting changing function is provided will be described in detail. In the following description, changing / setting the setting value is referred to as "setting change", and a series of operations related to the setting change is referred to as "setting change operation".

In the setting change operation in the pachinko machine 1, first, an operation for shifting the internal state controlled by the main control board 100 (main control CPU 101) to a "setting change state" in which the set value can be changed is performed, and then an operation is performed. , By performing an operation of selecting and setting a desired setting value (a known operation method in a conventional gaming machine can be used, and detailed description is omitted) while being controlled to a setting change state. , The set value can be changed.

Then, the operations for shifting to the above setting change state include the first procedure of opening the front frame 4 (frame opening) and the second procedure of turning on the setting key switch (setting key switch on). It is composed of a third procedure (RAM clear switch on) for performing an initialization operation on the initialization switch and a fourth procedure (power switch on) for performing a power ON operation on the power switch. However, the third procedure and the fourth procedure must be operated in parallel.

The first to fourth procedures will be described in detail with reference to the characteristic structure of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

In the first procedure (frame opening), an operation of opening the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 is performed using the door key. The door key is also called a common key, and is generally not unique to each game machine manufacturer or model, but a key that can be shared with other models of game machines is used so that it can be easily operated in a game store.

To explain the procedure for opening the frame in more detail, for example, the door key is inserted into the keyhole (not shown) of the locking device that holds the closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and the front frame 4 is turned toward the front while turning in a predetermined direction. By pulling, the front frame 4 can be released from the outer frame 2. The keyhole into which the door key is inserted in order to open the front frame 4 from the outer frame 2 may have a structure that shares the keyhole of the locking device 3c that holds the closed state of the glass frame 3 with respect to the front frame 4.

In the pachinko machine 1, a door open sensor 2p is provided on the curtain plate portion of the outer frame 2 in order to detect the open / closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and further corresponds to the door open sensor 2p of the front frame 4. A door open detection member 4p is provided at the position. For example, when the front frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door open detection member 4p is fitted to the door open sensor 2p, so that the door open sensor 2p is in the closed state of the front frame 4 (door). Closed) is detected. On the other hand, when the front frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the door open detection member 4p is separated from the door open sensor 2p, so that the door open sensor 2p is in the open state of the front frame 4 (door open). Is detected. The detection information by the door open sensor 2p is output to a predetermined board or the like, and is processed as an error if necessary. The above structure is an example of a mechanism for detecting the open / closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and may be realized by other known mechanisms.

FIG. 15 is a rear view (No. 1) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 15 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 before the frame is opened. However, when the outer frame 2 is removed from FIG. 15, when the front frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (the frame is opened). Corresponds to the rear view of the front frame 4 of. According to FIG. 15, on the back side of the front frame 4, the back cover 4h covering the rear side of the game board 5 is in a closed state. The back cover 4h is a covering member that normally covers the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (effect control board 200). Therefore, even if the first step of opening the front frame 4 is performed, these covered units cannot be touched as long as the back cover 4h is in the closed state.

In FIG. 15, the RAM clear switch cover 400p provided on the payout control board 400 (payout control unit) and covering the RAM clear switch 400q and the power supply board 600 (power supply unit) provided on the power supply board 600 (power supply unit) cover the power supply switch 600q. A power switch cover 600p is shown, the details of which will be described later.

Next, in the second procedure (setting key switch on), an operation of turning on the setting key switch 100q by using the setting key is performed. Unlike the door key described above, the setting key is a key unique to each game machine manufacturer (or model) from the viewpoint of security in order to prevent fraud related to "setting" that greatly affects the performance of the game machine. Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting key switch 100q is provided on the main control unit 5b (for example, the main control board 100). As described above with reference to FIG. 15, if the front frame 4 is simply opened from the outer frame 2 in the first procedure, the main control unit 5b is covered with the back cover 4h, so that the setting key switch 100q I can't insert the setting key into. Therefore, when executing the second procedure, it is necessary to open the back cover 4h.

FIG. 16 is a rear view (No. 2) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 16 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 from which the back cover 4h is removed from FIG. 15, and when the outer frame 2 is removed from FIG. 16, when the second procedure is executed (that is, the front frame 4 opens the frame). Corresponds to the rear view of the front frame 4 (in a state where the back cover 4h is open). According to FIG. 16, the main control unit 5b (main control board 100) and the peripheral control unit 5c (effect control board 200) covered by the back cover 4h are exposed. However, the setting key switch 100q has not yet appeared in a visible position.

In the present embodiment, the back surface of the main control unit 5b is covered with the main control board case 100n, and the portion provided with the setting key switch 100q is normally covered with the openable / closable harness cover 100p. That is, the setting key switch 100q is usually doubly covered by the back cover 4h and the harness cover 100p, and when the second step is executed, it is necessary to open the back cover 4h and then the harness cover 100p. There is. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the back cover 4h has a structure that opens and closes in the left-right direction, whereas the harness cover 100p has a structure that opens and closes in the up-down direction. By making the opening and closing directions of both covers different in this way, it is difficult to operate the setting key switch 100q from the gap in a state where the front frame 4 is opened small, and crime prevention can be improved.

FIG. 17 is a rear view (No. 3) of the pachinko machine. FIG. 17 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where the harness cover 100p is opened from the state shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in the state of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, when the harness cover 100p is opened to the back side of the front frame 4, the setting key switch 100q provided at the back thereof is operably exposed.

Therefore, at this time, the operator of the setting change operation (for example, the hall manager) inserts the corresponding setting key into the setting key switch 100q from the back side of the front frame 4 while keeping the harness cover 100p open, and determines the predetermined setting. The second step of turning on the setting key switch 100q can be executed by performing an operation such as turning in the direction.

Further, FIGS. 17 and 18 also show a state in which the RAM clear switch cover 400p provided in the payout control unit and the power switch cover 600p provided in the power supply unit are opened.

The RAM clear switch cover 400p is a cover that swings open and closes in the vertical direction. For example, the RAM clear switch cover 400p has a locking mechanism in a closed state, and the RAM clear switch cover 400p can be released to the front side after being unlocked by moving the RAM clear switch cover 400p downward. Then, when the RAM clear switch cover 400p is opened, the RAM clear switch 400q is operably exposed.

The RAM clear switch 400q corresponds to an initialization switch operated in the third procedure, and a predetermined initialization operation (for example, an ON operation by pressing the RAM clear switch 400q within a predetermined period after the power is turned on) is performed. When it is broken, a signal for initializing (RAM clearing) the control information stored in the main control RAM 103 is output. The initialization operation for clearing the RAM is not limited to the independent operation of the RAM clear switch 400q, and the power switch 600q is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q to clear the RAM. It may be the initialization operation of. Further, the range of information initialized when the RAM clear is executed is not limited to the control information stored in the main control RAM 103.

Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator of the setting change operation performs an initialization operation (for example, for example) on the RAM clear switch 400q from the back side of the front frame 4 with the RAM clear switch cover 400p open. By performing the ON operation), the third procedure (RAM clear switch ON) can be executed.

Further, the power switch cover 600p is a cover that swings open and closes in the vertical direction like the RAM clear switch cover 400p described above. The power switch cover 600p may also have a lock mechanism. Then, when the power switch cover 600p is opened, the power switch 600q is operably exposed.

The power switch 600q is a power switch that changes the power supply state of the game machine 1 (at least the main control board 100), and outputs a signal for switching the power on / off state when the power is operated. ..

Therefore, after performing the second procedure, the operator of the setting change operation performs a predetermined power operation (power on) for the power switch 600q from the back side of the front frame 4 with the power switch cover 600p open. By performing the operation), the fourth procedure (power switch on) can be executed. As described above, the third procedure and the fourth procedure must be operated in parallel (in parallel) at the same time. Then, by performing the first to fourth steps, the internal state of the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the setting change state, and the set value can be selected and set.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the first to fourth steps for shifting to the above-mentioned setting change state, the first step (frame opening) and the second step (setting key switch). If the on) is omitted and executed, the initialization operation is performed, and if the third step (RAM clear switch on) is omitted and executed, the current game setting (set value) is confirmed. Move to the confirmation state.

As described above, in the setting change operation in the pachinko machine 1, the second to fourth steps must be executed from the back side of the front frame 4 with the front frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 by the first procedure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts that attempt to change the settings while the front door (front frame 4) of the gaming machine is closed.

<Board composition>
FIG. 19 is a front view of a game board having a board surface configuration suitable for the present embodiment. The game board 5A shown in FIG. 19 is an example of a game board that forms a board surface configuration suitable for the present embodiment. Therefore, in the following embodiment, the game board 5 (see FIG. 8) which has been used as the game board of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be replaced with the game board 5A shown in FIG. The same components as those of the game board 5 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As a main feature of the pachinko machine 1 suitable for the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 uses a drum type effect display device 71 instead of the liquid crystal display device 70 as an effect display device for displaying decorative patterns and effect images. .. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 5A, the hold display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol displayed in synchronization with the first special figure hold lamp 173 and the second special figure hold lamp 174 is displayed. This is done by the hold display LED 75 instead of the liquid crystal display device 70.

According to FIG. 19, in the game board 5A, the drum type effect display device 71 is arranged in the opening near the center of the game area 5a. Further, in front of the drum-type effect display device 71 (on the glass plate side of the glass frame 3), a light guide plate 72 having transparency when not emitting light is arranged at a position covering a part of the display by the drum-type effect display device. Has been done. The display mode by the drum type effect display device 71 and the light guide plate 72 can be visually recognized by the player via the display area (design display area 710).

Further, according to FIG. 19, in the game board 5A, the sub-effect display device 73 is arranged on the right side of the drum-type effect display device 71. Further, below the sub-effect display device 73, a seg effect display device 74 composed of three segment display devices is arranged.

Further, according to FIG. 19, in the game board 5A, a hold display LED 75 composed of eight monochromatic LEDs is arranged below the opening in which the drum type effect display device 71 is arranged. An expectation degree display LED 76 using a full-color LED is arranged near the center of the lower side of the hold display LED 75.

These configurations arranged on the game board 5A will be described in detail below.

<Drum type production display device>
The drum-type effect display device 71 is a display device using a rotating drum (reel 711 described later), and in the symbol display area 710, variable display / stop is mainly performed in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Display the decorative pattern to be used and display the effect image including the notice effect. A belt-type reel or the like may be used instead of the rotating drum.

A light guide plate 72 is arranged in front of the rotating drum of the drum-type effect display device 71. Although the details will be described later, the light guide plate 72 is a display device capable of displaying a predetermined decorative symbol on a part of the symbol display area 710 by emitting surface light at the time of executing a specific effect, and is a drum type effect display device 71. The light guide plate 72 has a function as a sub-decorative symbol display device when is regarded as a main decorative symbol display device.

FIG. 20 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the symbol display area. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an arrangement and a symbol of the reels. First, the drum-type effect display device 71 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

The drum-type effect display device 71 includes three rotatable reels 711 (individually, left reel 711a, middle reel 711b, right reel 711c), a stepping motor that gives driving force to each reel 711, and a symbol display. It is configured to have a backlight (not shown) or the like capable of illuminating the surface of each reel 711 in the region 710.

The reel 711 (left reel 711a, middle reel 711b, right reel 711c) is a rotary drum on which a sticker on which a plurality of types of identification information (decorative patterns) are drawn is affixed to the outer circumference, and is accompanied by the operation of the stepping motor. By rotating and stopping, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in the symbol display area 710.

The drive current of the stepping motor of the reel 711 is switched on / off by the motor driver 92 (see FIG. 24), and the motor driver 92 is based on the drive control signal transmitted from the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201). Be controlled.

That is, briefly, the operation of the drum-type effect display device 71 (reel 711) is controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201). More specifically, the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) is a drum type effect display device based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined by the main control board 100 (main control CPU 101). The variation pattern of the symbol (decorative symbol) to be displayed by 71 is determined, and the reel control operation corresponding to the determined variation pattern is instructed to the motor driver 92 by transmitting a drive control signal. Then, the motor driver 92 operates the stepping motor according to the received drive control signal, so that each reel 711 rotates / stops at a desired timing, so that the desired symbol is variably displayed in the symbol display area 710.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, 12 symbols are arranged on each reel 711. Then, as shown in FIG. 20, in the symbol display area 710, display areas (left column, middle column, right column) for three columns corresponding to the reels 711a to 711c are secured, and the maximum in each column is secured. It is possible to display three consecutive symbols with (upper, middle, lower). That is, in the symbol display area 710, a total of nine symbols, three in the vertical direction and three in the horizontal direction, can be displayed at the maximum. Hereinafter, the display position of the symbol in the symbol display area 710 is indicated by a combination of columns and columns. Specifically, for example, the upper row of the left column is referred to as the "upper left row", the middle row of the middle row is referred to as the "middle middle row", and the lower row of the right column is referred to as the "lower right row".

Here, the reel arrangement shown in FIG. 21 will be described in detail. According to FIG. 21, a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on each reel 711. For example, in the left reel 711a, symbols imitating "7" are arranged at Nos. 7, 9, and 10, and these are referred to as "7 symbols". In addition, on the left reel 711a, symbols imitating dinosaurs with different patterns are arranged on Nos. 3, 5, and 6, and these are arranged in order of "dinosaur A symbol", "dinosaur B symbol", and "dinosaur C symbol". ". In addition, on the left reel 711a, patterns that imitate a part of a large dinosaur are arranged on Nos. 0 to 2 over three consecutive frames. These three frames are collectively referred to as the "great dinosaur pattern". Further, the symbols arranged at Nos. 4, 8 and 11 on the left reel 711a are symbols meaning detachment and are referred to as "blank symbols".

Similarly, when the reel arrangements of the middle reel 711b and the right reel 711c shown in FIG. 21 are confirmed, the above "7 symbols", "dinosaur A symbol", "dinosaur B symbol", and "dinosaur C symbol" are found. It can be seen that at least one is arranged in all reels 711. Regarding the "large dinosaur design", although the design differs depending on each reel 711, the designs arranged in three consecutive frames of the middle reel 711b Nos. 1 to 3 and the right reel 711c Nos. 3 to 3 The symbols arranged in the 5th consecutive 3 frames are collectively called the "great dinosaur symbol". That is, according to FIG. 21, each reel 711 has at least one or more symbols of a plurality of types arranged for each type.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when the symbols of the same type are stopped and displayed in a line in the symbol display area 710 due to the fluctuation stop of the reel 711, a special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is drawn. It is notified (or suggested) that the result is a hit (may include not only a big hit but also a small hit, etc.). However, as described above, since the "blank symbol" is a symbol meaning an outlier, even if the blank symbols stop in a row, the hit is not notified. Regarding the arrangement of one row by the "large dinosaur symbol", the "large dinosaur symbol" straddling three frames in each row is displayed in all rows (that is, the large dinosaur symbol is displayed in all nine frames of the symbol display area 710). Is stopped) is a condition.

Further, in the case of the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 21, there is no one reel in which three symbols of the same type are arranged in succession. Therefore, when the symbols of the same type are lined up in a row only with the symbols on the reel 711, they do not stop at the vertical line and always straddle the three rows of reels 711 and have three horizontal horizontal lines (upper line). , Middle line, lower line), or two diagonal lines in the diagonal direction (upward right line, downward right line).

However, the symbol arrangement of the reel 711 in this embodiment is not limited to the example of FIG. Therefore, for example, the blank symbol of the middle 9 may be changed to the 7 symbol, and in this case, when the middle reel 711b is stopped and the symbol display area 710 is stopped, the 8th to 10th symbols are stopped. , 7 symbols are lined up in a row on the vertical vertical line (middle line), and the hit can be notified only by one reel 711b.

Further, in the drum-type effect display device 71 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that the background of the design attached to each reel 711 is black (or a color having a high absorption rate close to black). Although it is generally called a black reel, by using the reel 711 as a black reel, it is possible to improve the visibility of the display symbol of the light guide plate 72 when the symbol is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 72, which will be described later. .. Further, by combining the symbol display by the reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 and the symbol display by the light guide plate 72, the player feels a sense of discomfort with respect to the overall symbol display in the symbol display area 710, and the effect is produced. It can also be expected to enhance the effect. Further, in the drum type effect display device 71, by making the space between the reels 711 and the surroundings black (or a color having a high absorption rate close to black), the above-mentioned visibility and effect can be further enhanced.

<Light guide plate>
Next, the light guide plate 72 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21.

The light guide plate 72 is a display device that emits light from a predetermined display surface (also referred to as a light emitting region) when light is input from a light source such as an LED provided on the end face, and emits and displays a pre-printed image. The light emission display by the light guide plate 72 is controlled by, for example, the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201). In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 72 serves as a sub-decorative symbol display device for the main decorative symbol display device (drum type effect display device 71), and is a specific type of symbol among the symbols that can be displayed by the main decorative symbol display device ( In this example, "7 symbols") can be displayed by light emission.

The light guide plate 72 maintains a transmissive state in a normal state when light is not emitted so as not to impair the visibility of the display effect by the drum type effect display device 71 arranged on the back side. At this time, the symbol display area All of the symbol display by the reel 711 in the 710 becomes visible to the player.

On the other hand, at the time of executing a specific effect, the light guide plate 72 emits and displays a predetermined image in a predetermined light emitting region with a light emitting pattern corresponding to the effect content, based on the control by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201).

Specifically, the light guide plate 72 shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 forms a light emitting region 721 at a position covering the display area of 7 frames in the symbol display area 710 having a display area of a maximum of 9 frames. .. More specifically for each frame, light emitting regions 721a to 721c are formed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the left column, light emitting regions 721d are formed in the middle row of the middle row, and light emitting regions 721e to 721 g are formed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the right column. Is formed. The light emitting area 721a located in the upper part of the left column and the light emitting area 721e located in the upper part of the right column, the light emitting area 721c located in the lower part of the left column, and the light emitting area 721g located in the lower part of the right column are light guide plates, respectively. Light can be emitted by irradiating light from a light source provided on the upper or lower stage of the left end surface or the right end surface of 72. Further, the light emitting regions 721b, 721d, and 721f located in the middle stage can be made to emit light by irradiating light from a light source provided on the upper end surface or the lower end surface of each reel, respectively.

Then, as shown in FIG. 20, in each of the light emitting regions 721a to 721g, "7 symbols" of the reel 711 are used as "specific types of symbols" among the symbols that can be displayed by the drum-type effect display device 71. 7 symbols of the same type as (see FIG. 21) are printed. The 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72 may have exactly the same design as the 7 symbols of the reel 711, or the player can recognize that the 7 symbols of the reel 711 are the same type of symbols. Or, as long as it has a role in common with the 7 symbols of the reel 711, a part or the whole may have a different design.

When the light guide plate 72 emits light, the drum-type effect display device 71 is controlled by, for example, the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) in order to improve the visibility and distinctiveness of the light emitting pattern in the light emitting region 721. It is preferable to partially or completely turn off the backlight that illuminates the reel 711 of the above.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with such a light guide plate 72 in front of the reel 711 of the drum-type effect display device 71 in the symbol display area 710, so that the symbol on the reel 711 is used when a specific effect is executed. The seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 can be light-emittingly displayed in a manner of covering the display, and the notification of the hit by the seven symbols can be realized in various variations.

As a specific example of the notification of the hit using the 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72, for example, by making the light emitting regions 721a to 721c emit light, it is possible to form a line of 7 symbols only with the 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72. Further, for example, a line of 7 symbols can be formed by combining the 7 symbols of the reel 711 and the 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72. Specifically, for example, in the symbol display area 710, the left reels 711a 9 to 7 stop in the left column, the 7th to 5th stops in the middle row, and the right reel 711c 9 to 9 stop in the right column. When No. 7 is stopped (a double tempai with 7 symbols in the left and right rows, but the No. 6 dinosaur C symbol is stopped in the middle row and is lost), the light emitting area 721d is emitted. By doing so, the 7 symbols are displayed in a manner of covering the dinosaur C symbol in the middle and middle stages, so that the 7 symbol lines can be formed by the two lines of the descending line and the upward rising line.

Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with such a light guide plate 72, and is produced by controlling the drum type effect display device 71 (reel 711) to display the variation of the decorative pattern (including the advance notice effect). By performing a specific effect using the light emission of the light guide plate 72 as a part of (may be), the hit is notified in a mode that cannot be displayed only by the reel 711 or in a mode that overturns the symbol display by the reel 711. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of game effects and to expect the effect of enhancing the game interest.

It is preferable that the symbols (7 symbols in this example) that can be displayed on the light guide plate 72 in the present embodiment give a relatively advantageous privilege to the hit notified by the arrangement of the symbols. More specifically, for example, when the arrangement of monster symbols suggests a hit of 2 rounds or more, while the arrangement of 7 symbols suggests a hit of 5 rounds or more, 7 symbols are used for the light emitting symbol of the light guide plate 72. As described above, it is conceivable to use a symbol having a high degree of advantage of the privilege obtained by hitting. Further, for example, when the arrangement of monster symbols suggests a normal hit, when the arrangement of 7 symbols suggests a probability variation hit, 7 symbols are used for the light emitting symbol of the light guide plate 72. It is conceivable to use a symbol having a high degree of advantage of the privilege obtained by the accompanying series of advantageous games.

Further, the symbols (7 symbols in this example) that can be displayed on the light guide plate 72 in the present embodiment may be expected to have relatively advantageous benefits depending on the number of lines formed by the symbols. Specifically, for example, when 7 symbols form one line, a hit of 5 rounds or more is suggested, whereas when 2 lines or more are formed, a hit of 10 rounds or more is confirmed, of which 8 When a line is formed (the maximum number of lines in this example, when 7 symbols are stopped in all the frames of the symbol display area 710), a probability variation hit of 10 rounds is determined, and so on. When it is possible, it is preferable to use 7 symbols as the light emitting symbols of the light guide plate 72.

Further, the symbols that can be displayed in a plurality of lines described in the previous stage (7 symbols in this example) can be displayed in at least one row by the reel 711 in the symbol display area 710. It is preferable that a plurality of the symbols are arranged on the reel 711. In the case of FIG. 21, the arrangement of the left reel 711a Nos. 10 to 7, the middle reel 711b Nos. 10 to 6, and the right reel 711c Nos. 10 to 7 satisfies this condition.

When a symbol having a high degree of advantage is used for the light emitting symbol of the light guide plate 72 as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment controls a drum-type effect display device 71 (reel 711) to perform a decorative symbol. By executing a specific effect using the light emission of the light guide plate 72 as a part of the effect related to the variation display (may include a notice effect), by executing a specific effect using the light emission of the light guide plate 72. , 7 symbols can be expected to stop on multiple lines, so the effect of further enhancing the interest of the player can be expected.

Regarding a specific effect using the light emission of the light guide plate 72 as a part of the effect related to the variable display of the decorative pattern performed by controlling the drum type effect display device 71 (reel 711), the "roulette reach effect" and "Roulette reach effect" described later are described. Specific examples will be given and explained in detail in "Seven Reach Production" and "Vision Opportunity Production".

In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 72 may be an optical device capable of switching between a state of having transparency (normal time) and a state of displaying a specific image (at the time of specific effect), and further. Speaking of which, a plurality of types of optical devices may be adopted. For example, a plurality of light guide plates may be arranged on top of each other, or for example, a device in which a substantially transparent excitation paint (such as a paint issued by a black light) is applied to the back surface of the light guide plates to emit light with different optical characteristics. May be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the position where the light guide plate 72 is arranged is not limited to the above-mentioned light emitting regions 721a to 721g, and the frame in which the symbol is displayed by the reel 711 in the symbol display region 710 (maximum 9 in this example). Of the frames), any position may be arranged as long as it covers at least one of the frames.

<Sub-effect display device (4th reel)>
The sub-effect display device 73 will be described in detail. The sub-effect display device 73 is an effect display device controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201), and can be used for variable display of decorative symbols by the drum-type effect display device 71 (or the liquid crystal display device 70). It can be used for interlocking effects, advance notice effects, and the like. In the case of FIG. 19, the sub-effect display device 73 is arranged on the right side of the drum-type effect display device 71, but the location of the sub-effect display device 73 is not particularly limited in the pachinko machine 1, and is visible to the player (normally). It can be placed at any position (including the case where it is covered with an accessory and is exposed in a specific situation).

Further, the sub-effect display device 73 may be a liquid crystal display device that displays an image on a liquid crystal screen, or a drum-type effect display device that displays a pattern using a rotating drum (reel) or the like with a pattern. It may be. In this example, the sub-effect display device 73 will be described as displaying an image on a liquid crystal screen by imitating the mode of a rotatable reel to which a predetermined pattern (icon) is attached. According to the image display by the sub-effect display device 73 of this example, it is possible to provide a reel effect that makes the fourth reel (4th reel) feel apart from the three reels 711 by the drum-type effect display device 71. Therefore, the sub-effect display device 73 is also referred to as a "4th reel 73".

FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining an example of an icon that can be displayed by the sub-effect display device. In FIG. 22, the arrangement numbers (0 to 11) when regarded as the 4th reel, the pattern numbers (1 to 5) for identifying each icon, the names of the icons, and the correspondence between the patterns are shown. Is summarized.

It is assumed that the sub-effect display device 73 of this example has a display area for two frames (two array numbers), and as shown in FIG. 22, each icon straddles two frames (two array numbers). It is arranged. The sequence number 0 means the initial position of the 4th reel 73. Specifically, when the power is turned on or when the normal display is restored after the production is completed, the sequence number 0 is placed in the upper frame of the display area. It is controlled to be positioned (that is, the "title" symbol of symbol number 1 is displayed in the entire display area). The "title" pattern with the pattern number 1 is an icon that is normally displayed, and has no particular meaning depending on the display.

The sub-effect display device 73 can suggest the degree of expectation or request a predetermined operation by giving each icon a meaning and performing an effect of changing the icon displayed in the display area. A specific example will be described below.

The "approaching" pattern with pattern number 2 and the "vibration" pattern with pattern number 3 suggest that highly expected pattern fluctuations and effects are approaching. Of these, if it means that the "vibration" symbol is closer to the fluctuation and effect of the target than the "approach" symbol, for example, the "approach" symbol is displayed as a preview effect by pre-reading, and then the pre-reading target variation starts. It can be used to display a "vibration" pattern when performing or while executing a look-ahead target change.

The "continuous hit" picture of the picture number 4 is an icon that requests the continuous hit operation of the effect button 3j. Further, the "deep push" pattern of the pattern number 7 is an icon that requests a pressing operation of the effect button 3j and a pulling operation of the second effect button 3k. As shown in FIG. 22, the "continuous hit" pattern and the "hard push" pattern are both assigned to the sequence numbers 5 to 6. This means that in the display of the 4th reel 73, both patterns can be appropriately interchanged and displayed. Then, for example, if an operation with a higher degree of expectation is required for a "push" pattern than for a "continuous hit" pattern, it is possible to give the player a strong interest in which pattern is displayed. it can.

The "CHANGE" pattern with pattern number 5 and the "explosion" pattern with pattern number 6 suggest that the situation or situation has high expectations. Of these, if the "explosion" pattern means a higher degree of expectation than the "CHANGE" pattern, for example, when the "CHANGE" pattern is displayed, the player can change to the next "explosion" pattern. Can be expected.

It should be noted that these are only examples, and the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment may prepare various other icons for the sub-effect display device 73 and associate various meanings with the icons. it can.

For example, the sub-effect display device 73 may display consideration such as "x1", "x2", and "x3". In this case, it is conceivable to change the privilege content notified by the drum-type effect display device 71 (or the liquid crystal display device 70) or the like according to the display content of the consideration display. Specifically, when the number of rounds of the jackpot is notified as "5R", the number of rounds is doubled to "10R" by displaying "x2" by the sub-effect display device 73. The production can be executed. In addition, when the number of time reductions is notified as "50 times", the sub-effect display device 73 displays "x3" to execute an effect that triples the number of rounds to "150 times". can do.

Further, the sub-effect display device 73 may display, for example, suggesting the type of special game. Specifically, immediately before or immediately after the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, "normal" is next to the line in which the symbols corresponding to the special game such as 7 symbols are lined up in a row (hereinafter, also referred to as "award establishment line"). Alternatively, it is possible to perform an effect such as "probability change" in which the type of special game acquired at that time is displayed by the sub-effect display device 73.

Further, the sub-effect display device 73, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit RUSH function, displays the small hit symbol on the display line of the small hit symbol according to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. A display suggesting the number of times the large winning opening is opened may be displayed. On the contrary, the sub-effect display device 73 displays a plurality of types of opening times of the big winning openings such as "1 time", "3 times", and "5 times", and stops the small hit symbol at the corresponding line. You may.

Further, the drum-type effect display device 71 pre-reads, and responds according to the display content (for example, the given point display) of the sub-effect display device located on the extension line of the line where the chance eye is stopped at the time of temporary stop of the pseudo fluctuation. When points are added and a hit such as reach effect occurs in a variable display of a decorative pattern with a high degree of expectation, the expected degree of winning branch is displayed on the sub-effect display device 73 according to the amount of points accumulated so far. It may be displayed.

Further, as a symbol of the sub-effect display device 73, a symbol imitating a bomb (hereinafter referred to as a "bomb symbol") and a symbol in which such a bomb explodes (hereinafter referred to as an "explosion symbol") are prepared, and the sub-effect display device 73 is prepared. When the bomb symbol stops, the seg effect display device 74 (FIG. 19), which will be described later, may be used to perform an effect of counting down from a predetermined value. In this case, when the count reaches "0", the display symbol of the sub-effect display device 73 is switched from the bomb symbol to the explosive symbol, and on top of that, the privilege of increasing the chances such as continuous pseudo-variation and development into super reach. May be obtained.

<Seg production display device>
The seg effect display device 74 is composed of three segment displays and can display three-digit alphanumeric characters and symbols. Each segment display is referred to as seg 741a to 741c in order from the left in FIG. 19, and the lighting of each seg 741a to 741c is controlled by, for example, the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201).

In the case of FIG. 19, since the segment 741a is composed of two segments in total in one vertical column, only "1" can be displayed when displaying numbers. On the other hand, the segments 741b and 741c are so-called "7-segments" composed of two segments in two vertical rows and one in three horizontal rows, for a total of seven segments, from "0" to "9". The number of can be displayed. From the above, the seg effect display device 74 shown in FIG. 19 can display numbers from "00" to "100" using the seg 741a to 741c. These numerical displays are used, for example, to display the number of remaining games (or the cumulative number of games) in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state, or to display the current number of rounds during the jackpot game (cumulative round number display). In addition to this, with regard to the effect display during fluctuation, it is conceivable to execute an expectation display effect that numerically indicates the jackpot expectation. However, as described above, the display by the Seg effect display device 74 is not limited to numbers, and can be used for other effect displays and the like.

The configuration of the seg effect display device 74 in this embodiment is not limited to the above example. For example, each segment 741a to 741c may have a changeable emission color, may be a segment display with dots, or may be a segment display having another number of segments. Further, the number of segment displays constituting the seg effect display device 74 is not limited to a specific number. Further, the display control executed by using the seg effect display device 74 is a display device composed of other than the segment display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a lamp provided near or inside an operation button, a board lamp, a frame). It may be executed by a lamp or the like).

Details will be described with reference to a specific example in the "player operation input effect" described later, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect display and the effect display can be performed by using the display by the seg effect display device 74. It is possible to notify the player of the valid period (operation valid period) of the effect button operation or the like.

<Hold display LED>
The hold display LED 75 is a display that displays a hold of a special symbol, and is a first hold display LED 751 that lights up in synchronization with a first special figure hold lamp 173 that indicates the hold status of the first special symbol, and a second special. It is composed of a second hold display LED 752 that lights up in synchronization with the second special figure hold lamp 174 that indicates the hold status of the symbol (see FIG. 23). The hold display LED 75 is controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201).

As shown in FIG. 23, which will be described later, the first hold display LED 751 is composed of a plurality of monochromatic LEDs corresponding to the maximum number of holds (4 in this example) of the first special symbol. It is composed of four monochromatic LEDs of the first hold display LEDs 751a to 751d corresponding to the ascending order. Further, the second hold display LED 752 is composed of a plurality of monochromatic LEDs corresponding to the maximum number of holds (4 in this example) of the second special symbol, and specifically, the second hold display LED 752 corresponds to the ascending order of the number of holds. It is composed of four monochromatic LEDs of hold display LEDs 752a to 752d.

In the present embodiment, since the first hold display LED 751 and the second hold display LED 752 are composed of a single color LED, it is not possible to perform a change effect of the hold color. However, it is possible to change the light emission mode such as switching between lighting and blinking in the display control indicating the hold state, and in addition, the physical arrangement relationship of only the hold display LED 75 to be changed is changed (for example, a slightly raised position). It is also possible to show a change effect by a method (such as moving to and not lining up horizontally), and a method that combines these may be adopted. Further, the colors of the first hold display LED 751 and the second hold display LED 752 do not have to be the same.

<Expectation display LED, claw accessory, small movable accessory>
FIG. 23 is an enlarged view around the expectation degree display LED. FIG. 23 (A) shows a state in which most of the expectation level display LED 76 is visible (LED exposed state), and FIG. 23 (B) is covered with a closed nail accessory 77. A state in which more than half of the expectation display LED 76 is invisible (LED coating state) is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 23 (A) and 23 (B), the expectation degree display LED 76 is an indicator arranged below the middle between the first hold display LED 751 and the second hold display LED 752, and has three internally. In a configuration in which full-color LEDs are arranged, light emission is controlled by an effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201). Since the expectation level display LED 76 is required to be capable of emitting light in at least a plurality of colors, in order to display more vivid light emission, a display device such as a liquid crystal display device (so-called mini liquid crystal) is used instead of a full-color LED. There may be.

Further, on the outer edge of the expectation degree display LED 76, a claw accessory 77 composed of three claw-shaped movable members is arranged. The claw accessory 77 is controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201), and for example, three claw-shaped movable members are at the positions (normal positions) shown in FIG. 23 (A) and FIG. 23 (B). ) Can be moved linearly from the position (operating position). When the claw accessory 77 (three claw-shaped movable members) moves from the normal position to the operating position, the LED is covered from the exposed state, and the claw accessory 77 realizes an operation of grasping the expectation display LED 76. To do.

The claw accessory 77 is not only a linear operation between the normal position and the operating position described above, but also a rotational operation in which three claw-shaped movable members rotate around the expectation degree display LED 76, and a claw. It is also possible to perform an operation in which the entire accessory 77 vibrates.

Small movable accessories 78 (individually, small movable accessories 78a and 78b) composed of two movable accessories imitating a dinosaur are arranged on the left and right sides of the expectation degree display LED 76 and the claw accessory 77. The small movable accessories 78a and 78b can be moved substantially left and right, and are controlled by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201). As shown by the arrows in FIG. 23 (B), by moving the small movable accessories 78a and 78b to the left and right, it is possible to realize an operation such as piercing the expectation degree display LED 76 and the claw accessory 77.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation degree suggestion effect that suggests the expectation degree of the current fluctuation (the fluctuation) can be executed by using the expectation degree display LED 76 (the expectation degree suggestion effect of the fluctuation). ). Specifically, when the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) controls the variation display of the decorative symbol, the expectation level for the current variation (the variation) is changed by changing the emission color and the emission mode of the expectation degree display LED 76. Can be suggested. Specifically, for example, the expectation display LED 76 is lit in white during normal times when no particular expectation is suggested, and the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 is changed to green or red during a production suggesting a high expectation. , Blink.

Further, when executing the expectation degree suggestion effect of the fluctuation using the expectation degree display LED 76, the claw accessory 77 or the small movable accessory 78 may be interlocked. Specifically, for example, before changing the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76, the small movable accessory 78 is moved left and right to show the action of piercing the claw accessory 77 in the normal position, and further, the claw role. By moving the object 77 to the operating position and putting it in the LED-covered state, the action of the pierced claw accessory 77 grasping the expectation degree display LED 76 appears. Then, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 is changed at the timing when the claw accessory 77 grabs the expectation display LED 76, and then the claw accessory 77 is returned to the normal position and the LED is exposed again. Object production is conceivable.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation degree display LED 76 can be used to execute an expectation degree suggestion effect suggesting the expectation degree of a predetermined look-ahead target hold (expectation degree suggestion effect of the look-ahead target hold). .. More specifically, when the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) executes pre-reading of the hold variation and the hold variation satisfying a predetermined condition is pre-read, the variation display of the hold variation (pre-reading target hold) is performed. By changing the emission color and the emission mode of the expectation degree display LED 76 at the previous timing, it is possible to suggest the expectation degree of the hold fluctuation (pre-reading target hold) in advance. It should be noted that, similarly to the expected degree suggestion effect of the fluctuation described above, the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 may be interlocked at the time of executing the expectation degree suggestion effect of holding the look-ahead target.

<Control configuration of game machine>
FIG. 24 is a control block diagram showing an example of a control configuration of the game machine according to the present embodiment.

<Main control board>
As shown in FIG. 24, the main control board 100 includes a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, an I / O port circuit 104, and the like. The main control CPU 101 controls the operation of the main control program to execute various arithmetic processes related to the game. The main control ROM 102 non-volatilely stores the main control program and various data. The main control RAM 103 functions as a work area and a buffer memory used as a temporary storage area (temporary area). The I / O port circuit 104 inputs / outputs signals to and from peripheral boards such as the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400 and each device under the control of the main control CPU 101.

The main control CPU 101 controls the game operation according to each instruction of the main control program by reading the main control program from the main control ROM 102 and executing each instruction on the main control RAM 103.

In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 includes a clock circuit, a WDT circuit, a CTC circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like.

The clock circuit divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock. The WDT circuit resets the main control CPU 101 to a normal state when the main control CPU 101 malfunctions or goes into a runaway state. The CTC circuit generates real-time interrupts and measures time. The random number generation circuit operates as a system separate from the program processing (software random number) by the main control CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number). They are electrically connected to each other via an internal bus (not shown).

The main control CPU 101 executes various processes related to the main control of the game by reading the main control program stored in the main control ROM 102 and executing arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch 161 and the like.

Further, the main control CPU 101 executes a game ball payout operation in addition to the effect command output port for outputting the effect control command for executing the effect operation associated with the main control of the game to the effect control board 200. It is equipped with a payout command output port for outputting the payout command of, and further is equipped with a strobe signal output port used for outputting a strobe signal for timing the target board to receive each of these transmission commands. .. The main control CPU 101 also includes various output ports, and the strobe signal output port 101B actually exists as a port that outputs a plurality of data combined with other output data.

The main control RAM 103 is a volatile storage means in which at least a part of the area is backed up by the backup power source generated in the power supply board 600. The backup area of the main control RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as the stack pointer and each register held when the power is cut off (hereinafter referred to as "power off"). When the power is turned on (when the power is turned off and restored), the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

The main control board 100 includes a setting key switch 100q for changing a set value, a first start port switch 161 provided in the first start port 61, and a second start port switch 162 provided in the second start port 62. It is electrically connected to various switches such as the operating gate switch 163 provided on the gate 63, the large winning opening switch 164 provided on the large winning opening 64, and the general winning opening switch 166 provided on the general winning opening 66. ing. On the main control board 100, detection signals from these various switches are input to the main control CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104.

Further, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 171, a second special symbol display device 172, a first special symbol hold lamp 173, a second special symbol hold lamp 174, a normal symbol display device 175, and a normal symbol hold lamp. It is electrically connected to various display means such as 176. The main control board 100 is electrically connected to various solenoids such as the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123 that operates the ordinary electric accessory 622 and the special electric accessory solenoid 124 that operates the special electric accessory 642. , The control signal from the main control CPU 101 is transmitted to these various display means and various solenoids via the I / O port circuit 104.

The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by, for example, eight parallel signal lines and one strobe signal line, and a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. It is said that communication is possible only by. That is, while it is permitted to transmit various effect control commands from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, it is not permitted to transmit commands and data from the effect control board 200 to the main control board 100. ..

The I / O port circuit 104 is provided between the main control CPU 101 and the effect control board connection connector 109 on the main control board 100. The main control CPU 101 and the effect control board connection connector 109 are connected by a strobe signal bus 112 composed of strobe signal lines in addition to the data bus 111 composed of eight data lines. The command data transmitted from the I / O port circuit 104 is received by the effect control board 200 via the effect control board connector 109 under the control of the main control CPU 101 as described later.

<Production control board>
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 24, the effect control board 200 stores the effect control CPU 201 that executes various arithmetic processes related to the game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, the effect control program, various data, and the like. Between the effect control ROM 202, the effect control RAM 203 that functions as a work area as a temporary work area (temporary area) and a buffer memory, and peripheral boards such as the main control board 100 and the image control board 300, and each device. It includes an I / O port circuit 204 for inputting and outputting signals.

The effect control CPU 201 reads the effect control program stored in the effect control ROM 202 and executes it on the effect control RAM 203, thereby controlling the effect operation accompanying the progress of the game according to the effect control program. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 is reset when the effect control CPU 201, which is a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, malfunctions or goes out of control. WDT circuit that returns to the normal state, TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller that generates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on register settings and signals from the CTC circuit, and input / output serial data A serial communication circuit for performing the above, a real-time clock circuit having a timing function (hereinafter referred to as "RTC circuit"), and the like are installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The effect control board 200 generates an image control command instructing the image control board 300 to output an image and a sound in the effect control process corresponding to the effect control command from the main control board 100, and is also connected to a lamp. A lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the substrate 91, a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so that bidirectional communication is possible. The image control command related to the image and sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300, and as a response thereof, a response command (so-called ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received. Is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

The effect control board 200 is connected to a speaker 11 that outputs sound, and the effect control CPU 201 controls the sound data generated by the image control board 300 to be output to the speaker 11.

The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit via the data line in synchronization with the clock signal.

The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for driving an LED transmitted from the effect control board 200. The lamp connection board 91 supplies or cuts off the drive current to the effect lamps 10 and 25 by switching on / off the switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal, and turns the effect lamps 10 and 25 on and off. Control to make it.

Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and a drive control signal (drive data) for driving an accessory is transmitted to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Output. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory by switching the switch in the circuit on / off based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the effect control board 200. Operate each movable accessory by turning it on or off. A parallel communication method is adopted for data transmission to the motor driver 92. Not limited to this embodiment, if the drive source of the accessory has a drive source other than the stepping motor, a control signal or a control signal may be sent to the driver IC corresponding to the drive source instead of the motor driver 92. Control data is transmitted.

The image control board 300 includes an image control CPU 301, a ROM 304, a RAM 305, and an I / O port circuit 306. The image control CPU 301 executes various arithmetic processes related to the image effect based on the image control command from the effect control board 200. The ROM 304 stores an image control program, various data, and the like. The RAM 305 temporarily functions as a work area or a buffer memory as a storage area (temporary area). The I / O port circuit 306 inputs / outputs signals to and from peripheral boards and devices.

The image control CPU 301 reads an image control program from the ROM 304, loads it into the RAM 305, and executes the image control program to control the image display operation related to the effect according to the image control program. The ROM 304 corresponds to the ROM on the effect control ROM board.

Further, the image control board 300 is provided with VDP 302 that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the image control CPU 301, and sound data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the image control CPU 301. It is equipped with a sound source IC 303 to be generated. The VDP 302 is a so-called graphic processor, which reads image data stored in an image ROM (not shown) in response to an instruction from the image control CPU 301, processes the image data, and outputs a video signal to the effect display device 70. Output to. A high-speed VRAM (not shown) used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM is connected to the VDP 302. The sound source IC 303 reads the sound data stored in the voice ROM (not shown) in response to the instruction from the image control CPU 301, synthesizes the sound data, and generates the sound data. The generated sound data is output to the speaker 11 via the effect control board 200 and the amplifier.

<Payout control board>
The payout control board 400 includes a payout control CPU 401, a payout control ROM 402, and a payout control RAM 403. The payout control board 400 drives the prize ball payout unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to control the payout operation (prize ball operation) of the game ball, while responding to the operation amount of the firing handle 12. The ball feeding mechanism 13 and the launching mechanism 14 are driven in synchronization to control the launching operation of the game ball.

<Power supply board>
The power supply board 600 includes a normal power supply circuit, a backup power supply circuit, and a power supply disconnection monitoring circuit. The normal power supply circuit generates a normal power supply used in each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game machine island. The backup power supply circuit produces a backup power supply. The power failure monitoring circuit has a function of monitoring a power failure due to a voltage drop.

The power supply board 600 generates and supplies a power supply voltage required for electronic / electrical components such as each control board and gaming equipment. A power switch 600q for activating the power supply circuit is connected to the power supply board 600, and when the power supply switch 600q is turned on while the primary power is being supplied from the power supply device of the game machine island, the power supply board 600 A predetermined power supply is usually supplied from the power supply circuit to each control board or the like.

The power supply board 600 has a function of detecting that the power supply from the power supply device of the game machine island is cut off (hereinafter, also referred to as “power cutoff”), and when the power supply cutoff is detected, a power supply cutoff signal for notifying that fact is given. (NMI signal) is transmitted to the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged while power is being supplied to the game machine from the power supply device of the game machine island. A RAM clear switch 400q and a door open sensor 2q are connected to the power supply board 600. The RAM clear switch 400q is a switch for temporarily erasing the stored contents of the main control RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the game machine is turned on. The door open sensor 2q is a sensor that detects the open / closed state of the front frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The RAM clear switch 400q and the door open sensor 2q may be connected to another board such as the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 600.

<Basic operation example of a game machine>
The game machine configured as described above starts the game with the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8. First, when the launch handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8 are sent out to the launch mechanism 14 one by one by the ball feed mechanism 13 provided on the back side of the glass frame 3. , The firing mechanism 14 launches the ball into the game area 20A at a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the firing handle 12.

When a game ball rolling down the game area 20A enters any of the general winning opening 66, the first starting opening 61, the second starting opening 62, and the large winning opening 64, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. Will be done. In the main control board 100, the main control CPU 101 transmits a payout control command instructing a prize ball operation according to the type of the winning opening to the payout control board 400, and the payout control board 400 receives the command and stores the command. The game ball of the tank 31 is paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first starting port 61 or the second starting port 62, this detection signal is input to the main control board 100. In the main control board 100, when the main control CPU 101 detects a ball entering the first starting port 61 or the second starting port 62, a lottery random number value of a special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is up to a predetermined upper limit number. Temporarily memorize as a reserved ball with a special symbol. When the predetermined fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the main control CPU 101 subsequently executes a special symbol hit / miss determination and a symbol determination for the lottery random number value related to the earliest reserved ball, and also performs a variation pattern determination to select a variation pattern. Is executed, and the special symbol is variably displayed using the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in an manner according to the determination result. At the same time, the main control CPU 101 causes the image control board 300 to execute the effect display device 70 to display the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation effect by transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 200. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variable time according to the selected variable pattern. Here, there is a ball entering the first starting port 61 and the second starting port 62 to acquire various lottery random value values, and further, the acquired random number values are held and the fluctuation start condition is satisfied. At that time, regarding performing the special symbol game by the special symbol display device, the process in which the special symbol game is executed as a result is referred to as "starting condition (establishes)".

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in the stop mode indicating a big hit on the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172, the game state is more favorable to the player than the normal game. The game shifts to a certain special game, and the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 64 is started in response to the operation of the special electric accessory 642. On the other hand, the mode of stopping the decorative symbol indicating the big hit in the effect display device 70 is, for example, an embodiment in which the types of the three symbols match. In the present embodiment, as special games, a 10R special game in which a round game is set to 10 times (10 rounds), a 5R special game in which a round game is set to 5 times (5 rounds), and a round game are performed twice. A 2R special game set to (2 rounds) is prepared.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game is shifted to the 10R special game, the 5R special game, or the 2R special game, the number of changes in the special symbol becomes a predetermined final number (also referred to as “ST number”) after the end of the special game. The probability variation function (also referred to as "probability variation") of the special symbol operates over the period until it is reached (also referred to as "ST period"). That is, in the present embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is not continued until the next big hit occurs, but is limited to the number of STs. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated in this way, the jackpot probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the low probability state to the high probability state, so that the probability of reaching a new jackpot increases relatively early.

On the other hand, after the special game is completed, the main control CPU 101 may activate a function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as “time reduction”) in association with or separately from the probability variation function of the special symbol. When the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol (and decorative symbol) tends to be shorter than usual, the number of special symbol lottery per unit time is improved, and the previous jackpot ends. It will be easier to win the next big hit in a shorter period of time.

Further, when the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated, the main control CPU 101 also activates the so-called electric chew support function (ordinary electric accessory support function). In the electric chew support function, any one of the functions of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol, the function of shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the function of opening and extending the normal electric accessory 622, or a combination of the functions are activated. When the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is activated, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than that in the normal state. When the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol is activated, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 622 is changed from that in the normal gaming state (when the electric chew support function is not activated). (For example, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is extended more than usual), so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 62 (also referred to as "easy entry state"). When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is activated, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 622 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a high possibility that the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol per fixed time will increase more than in the normal state due to the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 622 will be released. Since the ease of entering the second starting port 62 is also improved by the operation of the time extension function, there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting port 62 will increase. Therefore, by activating the variable time shortening function and the electric chew support function of the special symbol, the chance of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 62 increases during that period, and as a result, the player has It is possible to continue the game in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls as compared with the normal game state.

<Example of main function configuration of game machine>
The outline of the gaming operation of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is as described above, and next, the main functions of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of the functions of the main control board 100 mounted on the game machine according to the present embodiment.

The main control board 100 includes a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, a normal symbol lottery processing means 145, a special game control means 150, and a symbol. The display control means 155, the electric accessory control means 160, the game state control means 169, the error monitoring control means 170, the main information storage means 180, and the command transmission / reception means 190 are included. The above-mentioned means on the main control board 100 are mainly stored in hardware such as a main control CPU 101, a main control ROM 102, a main control RAM 103, an electronic circuit, and a main control ROM 102 provided on the main control board 100. It is composed of software such as a control program, but is expressed here as a functional block.

The ball entry determination means 110 is a detection signal from the first start port switch 161, the second start port switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the large winning opening switch 164, the general winning opening switch 166, the out ball detection switch 167, and the like. Based on the above, the entry of the game ball into each winning opening or the like is determined.

The game lottery random number generating means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated in the above-mentioned random number generation circuit, and adds the soft random number per special symbol described later to the built-in random number, so that the random number per special symbol used for the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is used. To generate. The game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main control CPU 101. These random number counters function as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software.

The software random numbers include a soft random number per special symbol that is added to the built-in random number described above to form a random number per special symbol, and a soft initial value random number per special symbol for determining the initial value and the end value of the soft random number per special symbol. , Special symbol per symbol random number used to determine the winning symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device, combination of missing symbols, etc.) as the stop symbol of the special symbol, initial value and end value of the special symbol per symbol random number Special symbol per symbol initial value random number to determine, special symbol variation pattern random number to use for selecting special symbol variation pattern, normal symbol per random number to use for normal symbol win / loss lottery, ordinary symbol per random number The initial value random number per ordinary symbol for determining the initial value and the end value of the normal symbol, the ordinary symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the like are included. The above-mentioned winning symbol means a winning symbol.

These software random numbers are updated once each time timer interrupt processing occurs, and the remaining time of the interrupt cycle is used for the initial value random numbers even while the timer interrupt processing is not being executed (during loop processing). And update.

The hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131 and a normal symbol hold control means 132. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, which is a random number value per special symbol, per special symbol, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 61 or the second starting port 62. The symbol random value and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol hold control means 131 stores the main information so as to combine the operation hold ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) with the entry order of the hold balls. It is temporarily stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of the means 180.

In the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area) and the hold 2 storage area (2) are in the order of entry into the starting ports 61 and 62. A third reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided, respectively. Each hold storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a random number per special symbol, and a random number of special symbol variation patterns as a set of operation hold ball information. The operation hold ball information is stored in the order of hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage area, while hold 1 storage area, hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage. It is digested according to the so-called first-in first-out principle in the order of regions. When the hold ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower numbered storage area, and the hold 4 is held. Clear the contents of the storage area to zero.

The special symbol hold control means 131 has a first special symbol hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol hold for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. It has a ball counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the special symbol's operation-holding balls is acquired as an update process of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol, and one operation-holding ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the special symbol hold control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command including the update information of the hold ball number (“symbol memory number command”). ”) Is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol. As a general rule, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they are entered, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. , So-called priority digestion is adopted, so that while the operation holding ball related to the second special symbol game exists, the operation holding related to the second special symbol game is held regardless of the existence of the operation holding ball related to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere. Under this priority digestion, when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is digested. It will be put on hold.

The normal symbol holding control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, triggered by the game ball rolling down in the game area 20A passing through the gate 63, the normal symbol per random value, the normal symbol per symbol. A random number value and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value are acquired, and the random value is managed as operation-holding ball information of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 has a normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 so as to combine the operation hold ball information of the normal symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) with the entry order of the hold balls. Temporarily memorize in. The normal symbol hold control means 132 has a normal symbol hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one of the normal symbol's hold balls is acquired as an update process of the number of hold balls of the normal symbol, and one action hold ball is digested. The corresponding counter is subtracted by 1 for each.

When the pre-determination means 135 acquires the operation-holding ball of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, the pre-determination means 135 executes a pre-determination for pre-reading notice for the operation-holding ball. As an example of the pre-judgment timing, when (1) waiting for a hit and when the operation holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for a hit and electric chew If the support function acquires the operation holding ball of the second special symbol while the support function is operating, or (3) the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during the big hit or the small hit, one of the conditions is satisfied. It's time to be satisfied. It should be noted that the main control board 100 executes a preliminary determination and transmits information to the effect control board 200 regardless of the timing at which the operation hold ball is acquired, and the effect control board 200 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed. It is also possible to decide.

Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads the random number value corresponding to the operation hold ball acquired this time from the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180, and draws a winning / failing. Pre-judgment (pre-judgment of winning / failing), pre-judgment of symbol lottery (pre-decision of symbol), and pre-judgment of variation pattern lottery (pre-determination of variation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although not shown, the pre-judgment table used in each pre-judgment corresponds to the total number of random numbers in the same way as the lottery table (special symbol winning / failing lottery table, special symbol per symbol table, variable pattern table) described later. The area is divided into a plurality of areas, and a lottery ID is assigned to each area (number of determination values). The pre-determination by the pre-determination means 135 corresponds to the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area as long as it corresponds to the random number value used for the lottery when the fluctuation actually starts. The data temporarily held in the register of the RAM or the CPU may be determined in advance instead of the data stored in the data.

As the lottery ID, a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as a “predetermined number”) is set. The pre-judgment means 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as a “pre-judgment command”) including information on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. .. It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, not only when the pre-judgment result is transmitted as information (lottery ID) to which random value range belongs, but also by using the winning / failing lottery table or the like used when actually starting the fluctuation. The result of the lottery may be transmitted in advance.

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes a special symbol winning / failing determination means 141, a special symbol stop symbol determining means 142, and a special symbol variation pattern determining means 143. When the special symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the special symbol lottery processing means 140 has a random value per special symbol stored in the earliest storage area (hold 1 storage area) of the special symbol hold storage area in the main information storage means 180. , The symbol random value per special symbol and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out, and these are stored in the special symbol hit / fail determination area, the special symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, "the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is satisfied" means that, for example, when the priority control of the second special symbol is adopted as in the present embodiment, (1) it is not a big hit or a small hit. All the conditions that (2) both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, and (3) the operation holding ball exists in at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. To be satisfied. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the special symbol is in a state where it can start changing.

The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 reads a random number value per special symbol from the special symbol winning / failing determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a winning / failing determination, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. To determine. The result of this hit / fail determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data (for example, "55H"), small hit data (for example, "33H"), and missed data (for example, "33H"). "00H"), after being used in the subsequent processing, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol winning / failing determination means 141 refers to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table at the time of this winning / failing determination. The "H" shown after each of the above data is an acronym for "Hexadecimal" and means that the data is represented by a hexadecimal number. For example, in the case of "55H", 1 It is shown that the byte data is "01010101B (" B "is a binary number)". In particular, in the case of decimal notation, no symbol is added or "D" is added for explanation.

FIG. 27 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol winning / failing lottery table referred to in a normal state as a so-called low probability state, and FIG. 27 (B) is referred to in a probability variation state as a so-called high probability state. It is a figure which shows an example of the special symbol winning / failing lottery table.

In this special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the random value per special symbol is associated with the judgment results of big hit, small hit, and loss. The winning probabilities of big hits and small hits are determined according to the random number range associated in this way. As can be seen from these FIGS. 27 (A) and 27 (B), in the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol game, in the normal state (low probability state), the big hit is only when the random number value falls within the range of "0 to 219". It becomes. On the other hand, in the probability variation state (high probability state), the jackpot range is expanded, and not only when the random number value corresponds to the range of "0 to 219" but also when it corresponds to the range of "220 to 2184". It will be a big hit. That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the jackpot lottery probability changes from a low probability state (about 1/300) to a high probability state (about 1/30).

In this way, the range corresponding to the big hit changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big hit is the same between the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol and the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol. Here, even if the random number value per special symbol does not fall within the range of the big hit, if it falls within the predetermined range, it becomes a small hit. In the present embodiment, a small hit exists only in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol. For example, a small winning is prepared in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol, and the winning / failing of the second special symbol. The lottery may be configured to have a higher probability of winning a small hit than the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol, or the small winning may be prepared only for the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment can be provided with a setting changing function for changing the degree of advantage of the game to the player according to the setting values of a plurality of stages. When the setting is changed in such a pachinko machine 1, the random value range that becomes a big hit is changed according to the setting (set value). Therefore, a special symbol winning / failing lottery table having a different jackpot range is prepared according to the set value. However, in the pachinko machine 1, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability in the low probability state to the jackpot lottery probability in the high probability state is constant regardless of the set value. Specifically, for example, regarding the jackpot lottery probability when the set value is "1", if the low probability state is 1/300 and the high probability state is 1/30 (10 times the low probability state), The jackpot lottery probability when the set value is "6" is 1/25 in the high probability state (10 times the low probability state) when the low probability state is 1/250.

The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol group to which the stop symbol belongs, based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. To do. The special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 is a first special symbol per symbol table that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and the symbol group of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a big hit. It also has a second special symbol per symbol table.

As shown in FIG. 28 (A), in the first special symbol per symbol table, the stop symbol, the symbol group, and the contents of the jackpot (probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening) are displayed with respect to the symbol random value per special symbol. The number of times the function is operated and the operation pattern of the large winning opening 64) are associated with each other. The numerical value "100" in parentheses means the number of operations of the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol, that is, the number of STs. In this table, the stop symbols "1" to "8" of the first special symbol are classified into two types of symbol groups A and B according to the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning symbol table is not shown when the winning / failing lottery is missed and the small hit is a small hit, but when the miss or the small hit is all a single operation, the winning symbol table is used. If you want to uniquely determine the out-of-order symbol and the small hit symbol, and change the fluctuation pattern or the control mode of the special electric accessory by giving each type of out-of-order or small hit. In the case of a hit, a miss, or a small hit, the hit symbol table may be used to determine the symbol.

Specifically, the symbol group A (10R specific time-saving symbol) is for the symbols "1", "2", "3", and "4", and the symbol group B is for the symbols "5" and "6". (5R specific time saving symbol), and symbol group C (2R specific time saving symbol) is associated with the symbols "7" and "8", respectively. In the present embodiment, the "specific symbol" is a symbol that activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game, while the "normal symbol" activates the probability variation function after the end of the special game. It is a symbol that does not cause it (the same applies to the second special symbol described later).

The symbol groups A and B are specific symbols indicating a so-called "probability variation hit" that shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the probability variation state (high probability state), and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a big hit within the number of STs. The probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are given only until the end without generating the above, or until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. To. For the symbol group A, the specified number of rounds of the special game is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. On the other hand, for the symbol group B, the specified number of rounds of the special game is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

The symbol group C shifts the game state after the end of the special game to the probabilistic state (high probability state) of the special symbol, although the number of times the large winning opening 64 is opened and the opening time are different from the above-mentioned "probability change hit". , So-called "sudden probability change hit", until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol ends without generating a big hit within the number of STs, or until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. The probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function of the special symbol will be provided only in the meantime. The specified number of rounds of the special game is two rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 1.8 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit, the symbol "9" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol by omitting the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol. A symbol group F (special electric operation symbol 1) is associated with the symbol "9". In the case of a small hit, it does not trigger a change in the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, electric chew support function) and fluctuation pattern selection state, and the game state is maintained before and after the winning / losing lottery. Will be done. If the result of the winning / failing lottery is wrong, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

On the other hand, in the second special symbol per symbol table described above, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), the stop symbol, the symbol group, and the contents of the jackpot (probability fluctuation function of the special symbol) are obtained with respect to the symbol random value per special symbol. The number of operations of the variable time shortening function and the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642 are associated with each other. In this second special symbol per symbol table, the stop symbols "11" to "18" of the second special symbol are associated with each other. , According to the type of jackpot, it is classified into two types of symbol groups D and E. Specifically, the symbols "11", "12", "13", and "14" are classified into the symbol group D ( The 10R specific time-saving symbol) is associated with the symbol group E (5R specific time-saving symbol) to the symbols "15", "16", "17", and "18", respectively.

The symbol groups D and E are specific symbols indicating a so-called "probability variation hit" that shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to the probability variation state (high probability state), and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a big hit within the number of STs. The probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the electric chew support function of the special symbol are given only until the end without generating the above, or until the next big hit occurs within the number of STs. sell. Regarding the symbol group D, the specified number of rounds of the special game is 10 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds. For the symbol group E, the specified number of rounds of the special game is 5 rounds, and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 in one round game is about 30 seconds.

On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a small hit, the symbol "19" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol by omitting the symbol determination by the random number per special symbol. A symbol group G (special electric operation symbol 2) is associated with the symbol "19". In addition, in the case of a small hit, it does not trigger a change in the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time shortening function, electric chew support function) and fluctuation pattern selection state, and the winning result is lost before and after the winning / losing lottery. As in a certain case, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the game state such as the probability fluctuation function is satisfied, and when the end condition is not satisfied, the game state when it is determined to be a small hit is maintained. If the result of the winning / failing lottery is wrong, the symbol "0" is uniquely assigned as the stop symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are prepared: 10R jackpot (10R specific time saving symbol), 5R jackpot (5R specific time saving symbol), and 2R jackpot (2R specific time saving symbol). .. The expected value of winning a prize ball (expected value of winning a prize ball) in a special game is in the order of 10R jackpot> 5R jackpot> 2R jackpot. Therefore, in the following, the 10R jackpot is also referred to as a "high profit jackpot" having the highest expected value of winning a prize ball, and the 2R jackpot is also referred to as a "low profit jackpot" having the lowest expected value of winning a prize ball. Even if the number of execution rounds is the same, if the long open round game (30 seconds) and the short open round game (1.8 seconds) are mixed, the jackpot with many long open round games is "high". It becomes a profit jackpot.

Specifically, the special game may include a special game that has a common number of execution rounds, such as unifying the number of execution rounds to 10 rounds, but changes in a predetermined round so that the mode of the round game is different. In that case, a special game of a type consisting only of a short opening round game in which the opening time of the large winning opening 64 is relatively short, and a long opening time of the large winning opening 64 after a predetermined number of execution rounds are relatively long. It may include a type of special game that switches to an open round game, the latter forming a "high profit jackpot". Even if the jackpot has the same number of execution rounds, the substantial profit, that is, the expected value of winning the prize ball may be different depending on the difference in the opening pattern of the big winning opening.

Here, as can be seen from the above-mentioned explanation, when a big hit is obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol, the 10R jackpot is selected with a probability of 50%, whereas the winning / failing of the second special symbol is selected. If a big hit is won by lottery, there is a 75% chance that a 10R big hit will be selected. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to enter the game ball into the second starting port 62 rather than to enter the first starting port 61 in that it is more likely that a larger number of balls can be obtained. The count number (specified count number) is the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 64 in a round game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 shown in FIG. 25 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol variation pattern random value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 has a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol, as illustrated in FIGS. 29 and 30 described later. The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 selects one of the variation pattern tables from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state and the result of the winning / failing lottery. The relationship between the fluctuation pattern selection state and the fluctuation pattern table will be described later. In each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are defined. In each figure, the "selectivity" is shown for the sake of clarity, but in reality, the judgment value (random value) for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Range) is set, and the fluctuation pattern is determined based on which determination value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. For each variation pattern, the variation time is set for each variation pattern as the end condition of the symbol variation, and it is premised that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed at the variation time. Is defined as. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, only a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns will be described as an example, but in reality, there are many more fluctuation patterns.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hits and small hits. The upper (A1) is a normal variation pattern table, the middle (A2) is a probability variation variation pattern table, and the lower (A3) is a special variation pattern table. In the present embodiment, the selected fluctuation pattern is set to be different depending on the fluctuation pattern selection state, or even in the same fluctuation pattern selection state, depending on the jackpot type.

In the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1), when the jackpot type is a 10R jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PX2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PX3 (super reach A) is selected, and when the jackpot is a 5R jackpot, the fluctuation pattern PY2 (normal reach A) or variation pattern PY3 (super reach A) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, the fluctuation pattern PZ2 (normal reach A) or the fluctuation pattern PZ4 (super reach D) is selected. In this normal fluctuation pattern table for big hits and small hits, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach mode is not selected, and when a big hit or a small hit occurs in the normal state, only the fluctuation pattern of the reach mode is selected. obtain.

In the probability variation variation pattern table (A2), when the jackpot type is 10R jackpot or 5R jackpot, only the variation pattern PX7 (super reach B) is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, either the fluctuation pattern PZ6 (normal reach B) or the fluctuation pattern PZ8 (super reach D) is selected. In this probability variation variation pattern table for big hits and small hits, the variation pattern of the non-reach mode is not selected, and when a jackpot or a small hit occurs in the probability variation state of the special symbol, only the variation pattern of the reach mode is selected. Can be selected.

In the special fluctuation pattern table (A3), only the fluctuation pattern PX9 (non-reach C) is selected when the jackpot type is 10R jackpot, and only the fluctuation pattern PY10 (super reach C) is selected when the jackpot type is 5R jackpot. Is selected. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R big hit or a small hit, only the fluctuation pattern PZ10 (super reach C) is selected. Here, the variation pattern PX9 of the non-reach C aspect is configured as an ultra-short variation time (2 seconds), while the variation patterns PY10 and PZ10 of the super reach C aspect are configured as a relatively long variation time (120 seconds). Will be done.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for detachment. The upper (B1) is a normal fluctuation pattern table, the middle (B2) is a probability variation fluctuation pattern table, and the lower (B3) is a special fluctuation pattern table. In the present embodiment, the selected variation pattern is set to be different depending on the variation pattern selection state and the number of balls on hold for operation of the special symbol.

The normal variation pattern table (B1) assumes that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected (because the variation of the first special symbol is the main component in the normal game state). In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), the fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3 corresponding to the non-reach A, the fluctuation patterns PH1-4, PH1-5 corresponding to the non-reach B, and the normal reach A (N reach) Either PH2 corresponding to A), PH3 corresponding to Super Reach A (SP Reach A), or PH4 corresponding to Super Reach D (SP Reach D) is selected. In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), fluctuations of non-reach A are excluded from pre-reading, and fluctuations other than non-reach A are subject to pre-reading.

In the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1), the selection rate of the fluctuation patterns PH1-4 and PH1-5 corresponding to the non-reach B may be changed depending on the number of reservations. Further, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the reach area (N reach A, SP reach A, SP reach D) basically does not change the selection rate according to the number of holds. However, in the case of a reach type with a low expectation such as N reach A, the selection rate may be changed according to the number of reservations. For example, when the number of holdings is small, by lowering the selection rate of non-reach A and non-reach B and increasing the selection rate of N reach A, the fluctuation time becomes long, so that the situation where the fluctuation display is not performed is avoided. The effect can be obtained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

The probability variation variation pattern table (B2) assumes that the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected (because the variation of the second special symbol is the main component in the probability variation state). In the probability variation variation pattern table (B2), variation patterns PH5-1, PH5-2 corresponding to non-reach B, PH6 corresponding to normal reach B (N reach B), PH7 corresponding to super reach B (SP reach B), Alternatively, any of PH8 corresponding to Super Reach D (SP Reach D) is selected. In the probability variation variation pattern table (B2), the variation of non-reach B is excluded from the look-ahead, and the variation other than non-reach B is the target of look-ahead.

In the special variation pattern table (B3), only the variation pattern PH9 corresponding to the non-reach C is selected. Here, the variation pattern PH9 of the non-reach C aspect is configured as an ultra-short variation time (2 seconds). In the special fluctuation pattern table (B3), all are excluded from the pre-reading target.

As illustrated in FIG. 30, when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order, it is set so that a different variation pattern table is selected according to the number of balls (0 to 4) on which the special symbol is held. Can be done. That is, by using a fluctuation pattern table according to the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol, the ratio of selecting a relatively short fluctuation time increases as the number of operation-holding balls increases, and conversely, the number of operation-holding balls decreases. The proportion of relatively long fluctuation times selected can be increased. It is also possible to classify the variable pattern table according to the type of special symbol. For example, in a state where the electric chew support function is operating such as a probability fluctuation state, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is easy, and as shown in FIG. 28, the jackpot of the second special symbol If it is advantageous, by setting the fluctuation time of the first special symbol to a long time, it is possible to create time for accumulating the hold of the second special symbol, which will be preferentially controlled for fluctuation. it can.

For example, in the case of FIG. 30, in the probability variation variation pattern table (B2) assuming that the variation pattern of the second special symbol is selected, the selection rate of the entire non-reach B (variation pattern PH5-1, PH5-2). Is a constant 750/1000 regardless of the number of reservations. However, looking at the distribution of fluctuation patterns PH5-1 and PH5-2 depending on the number of holds, the situation where holds are accumulated (“number of holds 2 → 1”, “number of holds 3 → 2”, “number of holds 4 → 3” In "), the fluctuation pattern PH5-1 (5 seconds) with a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected, whereas in the situation where no hold is accumulated (“number of holds 1 → 0”), the fluctuation pattern PH5- with a long fluctuation time is easy to select. 2 (10 seconds) is easy to choose. In this way, according to the distribution, when the holding of the second special symbol is reduced in the probable state in which the second special symbol is preferentially digested, a longer fluctuation time is likely to be selected, so that the second special symbol is easily selected. It becomes easier to expect the addition of the hold, and it is possible to suppress a disadvantageous situation in which all the hold of the second special symbol is digested and the hold digestion of the first special symbol is started.

After selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, so that the effect control command (“variation”) including the variation pattern information of the special symbol is included. A production control command (referred to as a "pattern specification command") containing information on a special symbol (symbol group) and a game state, and an effect command (referred to as a "symbol memory") containing information on the number of pending changes after the start of fluctuation. (Number commands) and the like are generated (hereinafter, these effect control commands are collectively referred to as “variation start commands”), and these are stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol winning / failing determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. When the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the random value per normal symbol and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random value stored in the earliest storage area in the normal symbol hold storage area. It is stored in the normal symbol hit / miss determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively.

The normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146 reads a random value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / fail determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes a hit / fail judgment, and determines whether the determination result corresponds to hit or miss. To do. The result of this winning / failing lottery is temporarily stored as a normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, and is cleared when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped after being used in the subsequent processing. The ordinary symbol winning / failing determination means 146 holds a normal symbol winning / failing lottery table that is referred to at the time of this winning / failing lottery. In the normal state (low probability state), the normal symbol winning / failing determination means 146 refers to the normal symbol winning / failing lottery table that is hit with a probability of, for example, "160/283", while the normal symbol probability changing state (high probability state). In), for example, by referring to the normal symbol winning / failing lottery table that wins with a probability of "282/283", the winning / losing lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed.

In the present embodiment, the normal symbol stop symbol determining means 147 refers to the symbol lottery table and selects a predetermined winning symbol when the result of the winning / failing lottery is a hit, while the predetermined winning symbol is selected when the result is a miss. Select the outlier symbol. When it is desired to have a plurality of control patterns of ordinary electric accessories, it may be designed to have a plurality of lottery results of the symbol lottery table of ordinary symbols. Further, even if the winning ordinary symbols are the same, the control pattern of the ordinary electric accessory can be changed depending on whether or not the game state is the operation of the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory.

The normal symbol variation pattern determining means 148 reads the ordinary symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and also refers to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table to display the variation of the ordinary symbol in the normal state. In, a relatively long fluctuation time is selected (for example, seven types of "4 seconds, 5 seconds, 6 seconds, 7 seconds, 8 seconds, 9 seconds, and 10 seconds" are uniformly selected). On the other hand, a relatively short fluctuation time (for example, "0.5 seconds") is selected in the time saving state (easy ball entry state) of the normal symbol.

When the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit, the special game control means 150 relates to a start demo effect and an end demo effect displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the special game according to the type of the determined big hit. Determine the demo production time. The special game control means 150 has an effect control command (referred to as a “big hit start demo command”) for instructing the effect control board 200 side to execute the start demo effect, and an effect control command for instructing the execution of the end demo effect. (Referred to as "big hit end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The jackpot start demo command also serves as an opportunity for the effect control board 200 side to determine the content of a series of jackpot effects (start demo effect, round effect, end demo effect) developed during the special game. Not limited to this embodiment, the demo effect time determined by the special game control means 150 can be determined based on the game state when a big hit occurs, in addition to the big hit type.

When the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "round effect designation command") for instructing the start of the round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the special game, this is generated. It is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes a round start command including information on the current number of rounds transmitted at the start of the round, and a large prize effect for executing a prize effect based on the detection of the large prize opening switch 164 during the round game. The winning opening valid winning command is included.

When the result of the winning / losing lottery is a small hit, the special game control means 150 determines the demonstration production time related to the small hit start demo effect and the small hit end demo effect displayed on the effect display device 70 or the like during the small hit game. .. The special game control means 150 includes an effect control command (“small hit start demo command”) for instructing the execution of the small hit start demo effect and an effect control command (“small hit end demo”) for instructing the execution of the small hit end demo effect. A command ") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 171 to variably display the first special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variation display is completed, the first special symbol Is confirmed and displayed. The special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol display device 172 to variably display the second special symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and confirms and displays the second special symbol after the fluctuation display. Let me. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 171 and the second special symbol display device 172 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 controls the effect when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, when the special symbol game timer manages the fluctuation time and the value becomes "0"). An effect control command (referred to as a “variation stop command”) for requesting the substrate 200 to display the decorative symbol is generated.

On the other hand, the normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 175 to variably display the normal symbol according to the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and confirms and displays the normal symbol after the fluctuation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 175 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 124 as a special game process after confirming the special symbol, and outputs the control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 124. The object 642 is opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the special game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 642 is regarded as one round game, and the round game is continuously executed for a predetermined number of rounds (10R, 5R, 2R in this embodiment). The electric accessory control means 160 holds a large winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 642 (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, when the jackpot type is a so-called 10R jackpot (symbol group A, D) or 5R jackpot (symbol group B, E), the jackpot 64 is opened for a maximum of about 30 seconds in one round game. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a so-called 2R jackpot (symbol group C), the jackpot 64 is opened for a maximum of about 1.8 seconds in one round game. Here, the closing condition (condition for ending the round game) of the large winning opening 64 in the special game is the elapse of the winning of the game ball of the specified count number or the openable period of the specified number of seconds.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a small hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 124 as a small hit game process after confirming the special symbol, and specially. The electric accessory 642 is opened for a short period of time. The small hit game is a special game composed of one round game, and is distinguished from the big hit game of the special game composed of a plurality of round games. In particular, both the small hit game and the big hit game are special games in which it is easy to obtain balls based on the operation of the special electric accessory 642, but in order to enable the continuous operation of the special electric accessory 642. It is separated according to whether or not the accessory continuous operation device is operating.

When the electric accessory control means 160 wins the winning / losing lottery of the ordinary symbol, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 123 to open the ordinary electric accessory 622 for a predetermined opening time. Here, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 622 for a very short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the normal state, whereas the electric accessory control means 160 is normally electric in the easy entry state (electric chew support state). The accessory 622 is opened for a relatively long time (for example, 4 seconds) as compared with the normal state.

When the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, the game state control means 169 determines the game state after the end of the special game based on the type of the symbol group related to the big hit, and after the end of the special game. Switch the game state of. In the following, among the various functions related to the special symbol and the normal symbol described above, the gaming state in which 1) the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chew support function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state". 2) The gaming state in which only the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric chew support function are activated is called the "time saving state", and 3) the gaming state in which only the special symbol probability variation function is activated is called the "latent probability variation state". 4) A state in which all functions are not operating is referred to as a "normal state". It can be said that the "probability change state", the "time saving state", and the "latent probability change state" are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal state".

In the following, each game state is determined by combining the operating state of the special symbol game (high probability / low probability) and the operating state of the normal symbol game (with electric chew support function operating / without electric chew support function operating) (1). ) Probability change state is "high probability / high base", (2) time saving state is "low probability / high base", (3) latent probability change state is "high probability / low base", (4) normal state is "low probability" It is also called "low base" ("base" refers to the number of prize balls per number of launched balls, and while the electric chew support function is operating, there is a possibility of winning a prize ball by operating an ordinary electric accessory. Is called "high base"). In the present embodiment, as an example, the game state after the end of the special game is the period from the end of the special game until the number of changes of the special symbol reaches a predetermined end number (that is, the above-mentioned ST number). The probabilistic state continues over a period of time (however, if the next big hit occurs within the number of STs, the probable change state ends due to the fluctuation, and at the end of the big hit game, the corresponding game is performed again based on the big hit type and the big hit symbol. Move to the state). If a small hit occurs during the ST period, the number of STs is not reset to 0, and the number of STs is continuously counted before and after the occurrence of the small hit. In the present embodiment, the number of STs is set to 100 as an example, but it may be set to another number. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol, and the electric chew support function are operated at the same time, and each function is continued as long as the probabilistic state continues.

If the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a big hit, regardless of whether the game state before the big hit is the normal state or the probabilistic state, it is the normal state during the special game and the number of STs is calculated after the special game. As a limit, it will be in a uniformly changing state. On the other hand, when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the special symbol is a small hit, if the gaming state before the small hit is the normal state, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also in the normal state. When the gaming state before the small hit is the probabilistic state of the special symbol, the gaming state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the probabilistic state of the special symbol.

When the result of the winning / losing lottery is a big hit, the game state control means 169 determines the variation pattern selection state after the special game based on the type of the big hit (types A to E of the symbol group), and after the special game. Switch the variable pattern selection state of. The variation pattern selection state is one of the conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern table described above. The switching time of the variable pattern selection state is the end of the special game or the end of the variable pattern selection state. In the present embodiment, there are three types of fluctuation pattern selection states, such as "low probability normal fluctuation state α", "high probability shortened fluctuation state β", and "high probability special fluctuation state γ". Here, the low-probability normal fluctuation state α is a special symbol with reference to the normal fluctuation pattern table (A1 in FIG. 29 and B1 in FIG. 30) selected when the gaming state is the normal state (low-probability state). This is the state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined. The high probability shortened fluctuation state β refers to the probability variation fluctuation pattern table (A2 in FIG. 29 and B2 in FIG. 30) selected when the gaming state is the probability variation state of the special symbol (excluding the limited period described later). It is a state to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. The high-probability special fluctuation state γ is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the number of symbol fluctuations corresponding to the fixed period immediately after the end of the special game (the maximum number of operation-holding balls (4) of the second special symbol). The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special variation pattern table (A3 in FIG. 29 and B3 in FIG. 30) in which selection is permitted only for the period (4 times) over the variation display: referred to as “limited period”. It is in a state of doing. In the present embodiment, regardless of which of the symbol groups A to D is selected, the fluctuation pattern selection state is (1) immediately after the end of the special game, and the high probability special fluctuation state γ is set only for a limited period of 4 symbol fluctuations. Stay, (2) after the end of the limited period, and when the number of executions is within the ST number (100 times), stay in the high probability shortening fluctuation state β, and (3) after the end of the ST number, that is, After the 101st execution, it stays in the low-probability normal fluctuation state α. Of course, until the first hit occurs, it will stay in the low-probability normal fluctuation state α. The game state control means 169 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "game state designation command") including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores the command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area. Further, not limited to the present embodiment, a plurality of special fluctuation states γ may be provided so that different special fluctuation states can be referred to at different timings of the period of one variable time shortening gaming state (). For example, a special fluctuation state γ2 is provided in which the player stays in the special fluctuation state γ1 four times after the end of the big hit, stays in the shortened fluctuation state β 95 times, and then stays in one special symbol game).

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, and the like. , Determine whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to the effect control board 200 in order to indicate the error state effect. Although not all shown in FIG. 24, the door opening switch is a detection means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 3 is open, and the frame opening switch (door opening sensor 2p) has the front frame 4 opened. It is a detection means for detecting whether or not the back set is open, and the back set release switch is a detection means for detecting whether or not the back set board is open. Magnetic sensors and radio wave sensors are detection means for detecting fraudulent acts (so-called goto acts).

The main information storage means 180 includes random number value information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, and a game state (probability change state, time saving state, Information on (easy entry state), information on variable pattern selection status, information on winning / failing lottery results (big hit, small hit, miss), information on stop symbols and fluctuation patterns related to special symbols and ordinary symbols, information on special games (round) Number, opening time, opening mode (number of opening per round game, etc.), status information indicating the operating status of the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, status information indicating the operating status of the special electric accessory 642, effect control command It is configured to temporarily store information necessary for controlling the progress of the game, such as data information, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

When a command transmission request is made, the command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and in order to distinguish the MODE data and the EVENT data, the 7th bit of the MODE data is “1” and the 7th bit of EVENT data are “0”. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output for each of the MODE data and the EVENT data.

The effect control board 200 can receive MODE data and EVENT data, respectively, triggered by receiving the strobe signal output in this way. As a general rule, the effect control commands generated in each process are transmitted as MODE data and EVENT data by one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The setting changing means 195 executes a "setting changing process" for changing the game setting. In the setting changing means 195, when the front frame 4 is in the open state (door open sensor 2p detects the door open) and the setting key switch 100q is in the on state, the power switch 600q is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 400q. In that case, it shifts to the above-mentioned setting change state.

When the setting change state is shifted to the setting change state, the setting change means 195 causes the setting display unit 197 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory (for example, a part of the RAM storage area provided by the main control RAM 103). The setting display unit 197 displays the set value by, for example, a 7-segment display provided on the main control board 100. At this time, the setting changing means 195 sets the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 197 to "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5" in response to the pressing of the predetermined setting changing button. → Change in order as “6” → “1” → ..., and update the set value stored in the setting memory to the same value as the display on the setting display unit 197. In this example, the RAM clear switch 400q is used as the setting change button, but other buttons may be used or a dedicated button may be provided. Then, when the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting changing means 195 ends the setting changing state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

The setting confirmation means 196 executes a "setting confirmation process" for confirming the game setting. In the setting confirmation means 196, when the front frame 4 is in the open state (door open sensor 2p detects the door open) and the setting key switch 100q is in the on state, the RAM clear switch 400q is not pressed and the power switch 600q is turned on. If so, the state shifts to the above-mentioned setting confirmation state.

When the setting confirmation means 196 shifts to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation unit 197 displays the setting value stored in the setting memory. However, unlike the setting changing means 195 described above, the setting checking means 196 does not change the installation value displayed on the setting display unit 197 even if the setting changing button (for example, RAM clear switch 400q) is pressed. Also, the setting value stored in the setting memory is not changed. Then, when the setting key switch 100q is turned off, the setting confirmation means 196 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 197.

The setting value data managed in the setting memory may not be the numerical values of "1" to "6" but may be the numerical values of "0" to "5" instead. In this case, the setting value "0" corresponds to the setting 1, the setting value "1" corresponds to the setting 2, the setting value "2" corresponds to the setting 3, and the setting value "3" corresponds to the setting 4. , The set value "4" may correspond to the setting 5, and the set value "5" may correspond to the setting 6. By using "0" as the normal value of the set value data, the RAM clear process is performed when the RAM is abnormal, and when the set value data is set to the initial value "0", the abnormality is not judged. Can be simplified. Further, when executing some lottery using the set value data, for example, when selecting a different table or data for each set value in the look-ahead processing, there is an advantage that the offset processing for the selection can be simplified. .. For example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, additional processing such as decrementing the start address by -1 is required when using these values as they are as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the numerical value of the set value data can be used as it is as the offset data. When the numerical values of "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, the setting changing means 195 and the setting confirming means 196 may display the numerical values of the set value data as they are on the setting display unit 197, or set. A numerical value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the value data may be displayed on the setting display unit 197. In the latter case, since the numerical data of "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of the settings 1 to 6 in the game setting and displayed, the display can be easily understood by the administrator of the game machine.

FIG. 26 is a functional block diagram showing an example of the functions of the effect control board 200 in the game machine according to the present embodiment. The effect control board 200 includes the effect lottery random number generation means 210, the effect control means 220, the lamp effect control means 230, the accessory effect control means 240, the error effect control means 250, the effect control information storage means 260, and the command transmission / reception means 270. .. In addition, each of the above-mentioned means in the effect control board 200 is a control program stored in hardware such as an effect control CPU 201, an effect control ROM 202, an effect control RAM 203, an electronic circuit, and an effect control ROM 202 arranged on the effect control board 200. It is a functional representation of what is composed of software such as.

The effect lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the effect control CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generation means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include a look-ahead notice lottery random number used for drawing whether or not the look-ahead notice effect can be executed, a look-ahead notice pattern random number used for selecting a look-ahead notice pattern, a decorative symbol random number used for selecting a decorative symbol stop symbol, and decoration. Fluctuation effect pattern random number used for selecting the variation effect pattern of the pattern, notice effect pattern random number used for selecting the advance notice effect pattern, jackpot effect pattern random number used for selecting the jackpot effect pattern, and whether or not the pending Uchirenso effect can be executed. Includes a lottery random number for the consecutive villa production used for the lottery, a random number for the consecutive villa production pattern used for selecting the consecutive villa production pattern for the pending villa production, and the like. These random numbers are updated by using the remaining time when the command analysis is not performed in the main process on the effect control side, which will be described later. Although the random numbers used for each lottery are given names for convenience, they may have random numbers that are commonly used.

The effect controlling means 220 includes the effect mode control means 221, the hold information display control means 222, the look-ahead notice control means 223, the decorative symbol determination means 224, the variable effect determination means 225, the notice effect determination means 226, and the jackpot effect determination means 227. ..

The hold information display control means 222 provides a first hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and a second hold ball number counter for counting the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. Have. When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command, and based on the operation hold ball number information included in the symbol storage number command, the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter and the second hold ball Update the value of the number counter. When the pachinko machine 1 uses the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 or the like as the game board, the hold information display control means 222 produces an effect based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter. Control is performed on the hold display unit of the display device 70 to display a number of hold images corresponding to the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol and a number of hold images corresponding to the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol. .. In the normal display mode, the hold image displayed in white is displayed when the operation hold ball of the special symbol is generated, while the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice is executed when the hold change look-ahead notice effect described below is executed. The image may take any of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow color" as a special display mode (display color) from "white" in the normal display mode (display color). The above four types of special display modes are related to the reliability of the lottery result being a big hit (referred to as "big hit reliability"), and are of "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow color". The jackpot reliability is set to increase one step at a time in order. In the present embodiment, when the reserved image changes to "rainbow color", the jackpot is definite in the operation holding ball to be read ahead. In the hold change look-ahead notice effect, the change in the display mode of the hold image may be expressed by a shape, a pattern, or the like instead of the display color.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 uses the game board 5A shown in FIG. 19 or the like as the game board, since the pachinko machine 1 does not have the liquid crystal display device 70, the hold information display control means 222 has the first hold ball number counter and the first hold ball number counter. 2 The hold display is performed by controlling the lighting of the hold display LED 75 (first hold display LED 751, second hold display LED 752) based on the value of the hold ball number counter. Specifically, the first hold display LEDs 751a to 751d are lit (or may blink) in order by the number corresponding to the number of operation hold balls of the first special symbol, and the number corresponding to the number of operation hold balls of the second special symbol is lit. 2 Hold display LEDs 752a to 752d are turned on (or may be blinking) in order. As described above, since the first hold display LED 751 and the second hold display LED 752 are composed of a single color LED, the hold display LED 75 is subject to a look-ahead notice like the hold image of the liquid crystal display device 70. It is not possible to execute a hold change look-ahead notice effect such as changing the display color for (hold-ahead for look-ahead). However, by changing the lighting of the hold display LED 75 to blinking, it is possible to specify the hold to be read ahead. Further, as will be described in detail separately, instead of the hold change look-ahead notice effect by the liquid crystal display device 70, the expectation degree display LED 76 composed of full-color LEDs can be used to execute the expectation degree suggestion effect of the look-ahead target hold. .. In the configuration of the game board 5A shown in FIG. 19 and the like, when a sub-effect display device displayed by a display device such as a liquid crystal is provided, each special symbol is displayed in the corner on the liquid crystal with respect to the display of the number of holdings. The number of holds may be small and displayed as two numbers. By additionally displaying on the liquid crystal in this way, it is possible to guarantee an accurate display of the number of holds even when the hold display LED 75 fails.

The look-ahead notice control means 223 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice by lottery, triggered by receiving the pre-determination command from the main control board 100. The look-ahead notice control means 223 distinguishes between the information on the pre-judgment result of the first special symbol and the information on the pre-judgment result of the second special symbol, and allows the operation-holding balls to enter up to a predetermined upper limit number (4). It is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 so as to be combined with the order. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100, and the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), in the order of entry into each of the starting ports 61 and 62, A hold 2 storage area (second hold storage area), a hold 3 storage area (third hold storage area), and a hold 4 storage area (fourth hold storage area) are provided, respectively. Each reserved storage area can store information on the result of pre-determination of success / failure, information on the result of pre-determination of symbols, and information on the result of pre-determination of fluctuation patterns as a set.

When the pre-reading notice control means 223 determines whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, the pre-reading notice control means 223 makes a pre-reading determination (“pre-reading determination”) for the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice based on the pre-determination result by the main control board 100. Also called). In the present embodiment, in the look-ahead notice, in addition to the above-mentioned pending change look-ahead notice, a so-called continuous notice effect that announces the possibility of winning a big hit or generating a reach effect over a continuous plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol is given. Have. When it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) can be executed, the information of the pre-judgment command from the main control board 100 (result of the pre-judgment) and the information of the symbol storage number command (the number of existing operation hold balls) are displayed. After analysis, a look-ahead notice effect pattern over a plurality of consecutive variable displays is determined by lottery for the operation hold ball (referred to as "trigger hold") that triggers the occurrence of the look-ahead notice effect this time. There are various variations of the look-ahead notice, such as a hold change look-ahead notice effect, a chance look-ahead notice effect, and a background change look-ahead notice effect. As another type of look-ahead, there is a hold-in-ream villa effect that suggests or notifies the possibility that there is an operation-holding ball that becomes a big hit during a big-hit game or when a fluctuation that becomes a big-hit winning is executed.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern look-ahead determination table. The variation pattern look-ahead determination table illustrated in FIG. 31 is a determination table used in the look-ahead determination by the look-ahead advance notice control means 223, and the variation of each variation determined by using the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 30 and the like. The look-ahead type (A to D) is selected based on the pattern.

According to FIG. 31, the look-ahead type A (non-look-ahead) is a fluctuation pattern that is not subject to look-ahead (according to FIG. 30, fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, PH1-3, PH5-1, PH5-2). Is selected from. When the look-ahead type A is selected, the look-ahead effect targeting the change is not executed.

Here, the selectivity of non-reach A, which is excluded from the pre-reading target in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of FIG. 30, is the sum of the fluctuation patterns PH1-1, PH1-2, and PH1-3, regardless of the number of reservations. It is 750/1000, which matches the selection rate of the look-ahead type A in FIG. That is, in this example, when the fluctuation pattern of non-reach A is determined in the normal time (first special symbol), the look-ahead effect for the fluctuation is not always executed, and the look-ahead determination results are all ID = 0. Further, in the normal fluctuation pattern table (B1) of FIG. 30, only non-reach A is set so that the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern fluctuates depending on the number of reservations. From this, it can be said that in this example, the look-ahead determination result is all ID = 0 in the range of the random number value in which the fluctuation pattern whose selectivity depends on the number of holds is selected.

The look-ahead type B (weak look-ahead) is selected from the non-reach (variation pattern PH1-4, PH1-5) of the read-ahead target at the normal time or the fluctuation pattern determined as the N reach (variation pattern PH6) at the time of probability change. To. When the look-ahead type B is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a low expectation is executed for the fluctuation.

The look-ahead type C (medium look-ahead) is selected from the fluctuation patterns determined by the normal N reach (variation pattern PH2) or the N reach B or SP reach B (variation pattern PH6, PH7) at the time of probability variation. When the look-ahead type C is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a moderate degree of expectation is executed for the fluctuation.

The look-ahead type D (strong look-ahead) is selected from fluctuation patterns determined to be SP reach or higher (variation pattern PH3, PH4) at the time of normal change, or SP reach D (variation pattern PH8) at the time of probability change. When the look-ahead type D is selected, a predetermined (or arbitrary) look-ahead effect having a high degree of expectation is executed for the fluctuation. Note that configuring the look-ahead effect with different expectations to be executed depending on the look-ahead types B, C, and D makes the lottery table for the look-ahead effect different according to the ID of the look-ahead determination result on the main control board 100. Alternatively, it can be executed by changing the result of using the same table to a look-ahead effect higher than the winning look-ahead effect.

In the above example, the fluctuation pattern look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. 31 is shown as a common table for normal time and probabilistic change, but the present embodiment is not limited to this, and normal time and probable change time are used. A different table may be prepared for the first special symbol and a different table for the second special symbol.

The effect mode control means 221 controls the transition of the effect mode so as to be consistent with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100. Execute. In the present embodiment, the normal effect mode α, the probability variation effect mode β, and the special effect mode γ are included as the three types of effect modes, and the variation pattern of the special symbol instructed from the main control board 100 is the same. However, the variation effect pattern (detailed later) that specifies the specific content of the symbol variation effect is set to be different for each effect mode. The effect display device 70 displays an effect mode notification image (in the present embodiment, a background image for displaying the back of the decorative pattern) corresponding to the effect mode during the current stay, and this background image is displayed for each effect mode. Since they are set to be different from each other, the player can recognize which of the production modes during the current stay is from the type of background image.

Each production mode will be outlined. First, the normal effect mode α is set when the low-probability normal fluctuation state α is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and the “normal background” is displayed as the background image thereof. .. The probability variation effect mode β is set when the high probability shortening variation state β is selected as the variation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side, and the “probability variation background” is displayed as the background image thereof. The special effect mode γ is set when the high-probability special fluctuation state γ is selected as the fluctuation pattern selection state on the main control board 100 side. This special effect mode stays for a limited period of four times (limited period) immediately after the end of the special game, and when this limited period is exceeded, the mode shifts to the probability variation effect mode β. If a pending villa production occurs during a special game, a "special background" is displayed as a background image. On the other hand, when the pending in-house consecutive villa effect does not occur during the special game, that is, when the continuous variation effect is not executed, the "probability change background" common to the probability change effect mode is displayed as the background image.

The decorative symbol determining means 224 is a combination of the final stop symbols of the decorative symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, and so on) based on the information (variation pattern information, character effect number information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. The design on the right) will be decided by lottery. In the present embodiment, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured. This decorative pattern is formed by, for example, an identification element consisting of numbers or letters. In the present embodiment, a total of 10 types such as numbers "1" to "9" and letters "S" are set as identification elements. Each decorative symbol is in the order of "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> ...-> "8"-> "9"-> "S" according to the arrangement of the symbol row, left display area, middle display area and right. Each is cyclically displayed in the display area.

The decorative symbol determination means 224 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for large hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for loss of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-reach loss. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a missed symbol (missing symbol)". The jackpot symbol indicating the specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered symbols are aligned. The jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2.2.2") in which three identical even-numbered symbols are aligned. The out-of-order symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "1.3.8") in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol having a number different from the other numbers. Here, among the out-of-reach symbols, the out-of-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a "stop symbol indicating a small hit (small hit symbol)" or a 2R jackpot symbol even if it is a big hit symbol, it is a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7". In some cases. In this embodiment, "SS" is provided as a special jackpot symbol for definitively notifying the pending villa. The decorative symbol determination means 224 is a normal jackpot symbol (such as "3.3.3") when it is determined to execute the pending villa effect and the villa effect pattern PA2 is selected. Is replaced with a special jackpot symbol ("SS").

The variation effect determining means 225 defines the variation process (effect process) from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the information (variation pattern information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100. Determine the production pattern. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation effect (reach effect) performed after the reach display includes a reach effect with a simple effect content (normal reach effect) and a reach effect in which the effect content develops in the middle (super reach effect). .. The variation effect determining means 225 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting the variation effect pattern, and the variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Is selected. In the variation effect pattern table, the variation effect pattern random value and the variation effect pattern are associated with each other according to the result of the variation pattern lottery of the special symbol (that is, the reach type). Here, while the basic pattern of symbol variation (for example, "normal reach A", "super reach A", etc.) is determined as the variation pattern on the main control board 100 side, the effect control board 200 side is the variation effect pattern. Based on the basic pattern, the detailed pattern of the symbol variation (for example, "normal reach A1, A2, A3 ...", "super reach A1, A2, A3 ...", etc.) that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. In this way, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol defines a variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the end of the variation, and each of the scenarios in the display process. The timing for generating the notice effect at the stage is also defined as the time schedule. The stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variation effect pattern, and in the present embodiment, in principle, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, in the case of a variation effect pattern with a short variation time, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and in the case of a specific variation effect pattern, the left symbol → the middle symbol → the right symbol are in this order. It can also be stopped. At this time, if the stop order is not the above-mentioned principle (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high.

The advance notice effect determination means 226 determines the advance notice effect pattern that defines the content of the advance notice effect to be executed at each stage of the change process of the decorative symbol according to the scenario of the variation effect pattern described above. The advance notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for displaying an image of a specific character, an animation, or the like temporarily or stepwise, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and suggests that the jackpot reliability is high, in which the symbol variation stops in the jackpot mode. The notice effect includes a notice effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including the time when the reach occurs) in the process of changing the decorative symbol, and a notice effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each notice effect has a different jackpot reliability. Basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher jackpot reliability than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The advance notice effect determination means 226 holds the advance notice effect pattern table referred to when selecting the advance notice effect pattern for each type of advance notice effect, and corresponds to the type of advance notice effect generated according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. Select the advance notice effect pattern table. The advance notice effect determination means 226 refers to the advance notice effect pattern table selected above, and is selected from a plurality of types of advance notice effect patterns by lottery based on the advance notice effect pattern random number value acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210. Select one. Specific types of advance notice effect patterns include comment advance notice effect patterns, background advance notice effect patterns, SU (step-up) advance notice effect patterns, group advance notice effect patterns, cut-in advance notice effect patterns, and character movable advance notice effect patterns. Etc. are prepared. This advance notice effect is basically performed by executing one or a plurality of advance notice effects in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even if the decorative pattern is variablely displayed by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice effects.

The jackpot effect determining means 227 determines the content of the jackpot effect (big hit effect pattern) for notifying that the special game is in progress. The jackpot effect includes a start demo effect that notifies the start of the special game, a round effect that notifies that the round game is in progress, and an end demo effect that notifies the end of the special game. When the jackpot effect determining means 227 receives the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100, the jackpot effect effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect) is based on the information of the jackpot type stored in the effect control information storage means 260. Pattern, end demo production pattern) is decided. In this jackpot production pattern, the jackpot start demo production time, the round production time (the production time according to the opening pattern of the jackpot 64), and the jackpot end demo production time are set according to the jackpot type, and the jackpot end demo production time is set. A series of production contents are set along the time axis. The jackpot effect determining means 227 executes the start demo effect when the jackpot start demo command is received from the main control board 100 according to the jackpot effect pattern, and performs each round effect when the round effect designation command is received. Execute, and execute the end demo effect when the jackpot end demo command is received.

Here, in the normal jackpot start demo production, for example, the characters "big hit start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the special game. In a normal round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the special game are displayed. In the normal jackpot end demo production, for example, the characters "big hit end" are displayed on the screen to notify the end of the special game.

As described above, the effect controlling means 220 is an image control command related to the image and sound based on the determined effect contents (look-ahead effect pattern, consecutive villa effect pattern, variable effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop pattern pattern, jackpot effect pattern, etc.). Is generated and stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260.

The lamp effect control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, and the like according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The lamp effect control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamps 10 and 25 (frame lamp 10, panel lamp 25), and corresponds to the determined effect pattern. The lamp data is read out, and the lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

The accessory effect control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory according to the effect content set by the effect control means 220. The accessory effect control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. ..

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify the gaming machine that an error state has occurred according to the error effect pattern. There is.

The effect control information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative symbol information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like, and is configured to temporarily store each piece of information. It has a predetermined storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. Contains an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands, respectively.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 as a trigger for receiving the strobe signal output together, and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer. ing. Specifically, the command transmission / reception means 270 executes reception interrupt processing of the effect control command in response to an interrupt generated when a strobe signal from the main control board 100 is input, and various types of reception interrupt processing are performed. Acquire the effect control command of. The details of the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command will be described later. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 executes the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command with priority over other interrupt processing.

The command transmission / reception means 270 is stored in the effect control information storage unit 260 in order to instruct the execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. An image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 using a serial communication method as an example. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this embodiment) according to the order set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260.

As a result, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation effect pattern. , The notice effect is displayed by superimposing it on the effect of the symbol variation at each stage of the variation display process. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300, and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer.

<Processing on the main control board side>
32 to 53 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of operation processing on the main control board 100. The operation processing on the main control board 100 side mainly includes the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main processing on the main control side>
32, 33, and 34 are flowcharts showing an example of the main control side main process executed on the main control board 100, respectively. In this main control side main process, the main control program is started after the security check of the main control CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, and the process is executed by this main control program. In the following description, the subject of each process may be omitted as appropriate.

First, as the initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (step S1), and the access permission of the main control RAM 103 is performed (step S2). Next, a vector table in which the start address of the main control program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (step S3), and an initial value is set in the internal register of the main control CPU 101 (step S4).

Next, the main control CPU 101 confirms the operating state of the setting key switch 100q (step S5), and if the setting key switch 100q is in the ON state (YES in step S5), confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch 400q. (Step S6). If the RAM clear switch 400q is in the ON state in step S6 (YES in step S6), the setting change process is executed (step S7). The details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, but after the setting change process is completed, the process proceeds to step S13. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is in the off state in step S6 (NO in step S6), the setting confirmation process is executed (step S8). The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, but after the setting confirmation process is completed, the process proceeds to step S10.

If the setting key switch 100q is in the off state in step S5 (NO in step S5), the main control CPU 101 confirms the operating state of the RAM clear switch 400q (step S9). If the RAM clear switch 400q is in the ON state in step S9 (YES in step S9), the process proceeds to step S13 in order to perform a normal RAM clear process without changing the setting. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 400q is in the off state in step S9 (NO in step S6), the process proceeds to step S10 without performing any special processing.

In step S10, the main control CPU 101 reads the value of the power off information flag and determines whether or not the power off normal information is stored (step S10).

Here, when the information on the normal power failure is stored, the checksum is calculated for the predetermined area of the main control RAM 103 (step S11). It is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (step S12). Note that the checksum at power-on calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off process described later, so if it is backed up normally, the checksum at power-on will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined at the time of turning on the power whether or not the information stored in the main control RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up.

If the checksum is normal in step S12 (YES in step S12), the process proceeds to step S16, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal in step S12 (NO in step S12), or after the setting change process in step S7 is completed, the entire area of the main control RAM 103 targeted for the initialization process is cleared to zero (NO). Step S13). In the initialization process of step S13, the specific RAM storage area is not cleared to zero. For example, the set value stored in the setting memory is not cleared, and the set value set in the setting change process in step S7 is retained as it is.

Next, the initialization data at the time of turning on the power is set in the main control RAM 103 (step S14). Next, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamps 10 and 25, and the like, an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is requested (step S15).

Next, in the power-off / recovery setting process, the main control RAM 103 sequentially executes the setting of power-on normal information, the initial setting of various errors, and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 400 (step S16). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on was performed correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the information of the power-off occurrence is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and the data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (step S17). The value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and the power off / return process related to the special symbol game is executed (step S18).

Next, a transmission request for an effect control command (“power off / return command”) at the time of power failure / recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is performed (step S19). This power off / return command includes information on the communication line inspection, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of probability fluctuations, the number of time reductions, the number of easy entry states, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. The untransmitted command request before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, the information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information on the number of operation-holding balls is requested ( Step S20).

Next, a return setting is made to return the normal electric accessory 622 to the state before the power is cut off (for example, the second starting port 62 is in the open state) (step S21). Further, a return setting is made to return the special electric accessory 642 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the large winning opening 64 is in the open state) (step S22). Next, the value of the special symbol mode flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (step S23). The special symbol mode flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (step S24). Next, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S25). Clear word 1 (“55H”) is set in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer (step S26).

Next, in order to determine the occurrence of the power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read and it is determined whether or not the power failure has occurred (step S27). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number update process is executed (step S28). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value set for each random number, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

Next, interrupt enable is set to allow the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (step S29), the process returns to the above-mentioned interrupt prohibition process (step S25), and the loop process from steps S25 to S29 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time between the completion of the previous interrupt processing and the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to perform steps S25 to S25. The process up to S29 is repeated. If an interrupt request is made in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is enabled in step S29. On the other hand, when the power off confirmation flag is turned on in step S27, that is, when a power off occurs, the process proceeds to step S30 to execute the following power off time process.

Next, as the power cutoff processing (steps S30 to S36), first, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (step S30). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power off information flag is the power-on normal data (step S31). If the power-on normal information is used, the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (step S32). On the other hand, if the power-on normal information is not obtained, the power-off abnormality data is set in the power-off information flag (step S33), and the process proceeds to step S36.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the main control RAM 103 (step S34). The complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the main control RAM 103 (step S35). Next, the access prohibition setting of the main control RAM 103 is performed (step S36), and the process is repeatedly executed until the power is cut off.

<Setting change processing>
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The series of processes illustrated in FIG. 35 shows in detail the setting change process in step S107 in FIG. 32, and is executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

According to FIG. 35, first, the main control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the value of the setting memory in which the setting value of the game setting should be stored is normal (step S101). If the set memory value is not normal in step S101 (NO in S101), the set value is initialized to the initial value (S102). Specifically, for example, when "1" to "6" are used as the set value data, "1" is set as the initial value, and when "0" to "5" are used as the set value data, "1" is set as the initial value. Set "0". After the process of step S102, the process proceeds to step S103. On the other hand, if the set memory value is normal in step S101 (YES in S101), the process of step S102 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the state shifts to the setting change state. Then, the set value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 197 (step S104).

Next, it is confirmed whether or not there is a change operation by the setting change button (for example, RAM clear switch 400q) (step S105). When there is a change operation by the setting change button (YES in step S105), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 197 is updated and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (step S106). If there is no change operation by the setting change button (NO in step S105), the process of step S106 is skipped.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the operating state of the setting key switch 100q is in the off state (step S107). If NO is determined in step S5 of FIG. 32 and the setting key switch 100q remains in the ON state (NO in step S107), the process returns to step S104 and the process is repeated. On the other hand, when the setting key is returned to the original state and the setting key switch 100q is turned off (YES in step S107), the setting display unit 197 is turned off so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (hidden) (step). S108), return. As described above, after the return, the process of step S13 of FIG. 32 is performed.

<Setting confirmation process>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The series of processes illustrated in FIG. 36 shows in detail the setting confirmation process in step S108 in FIG. 32, and is executed by the main control CPU 101 (main control program).

According to FIG. 36, first, the main control CPU 101 causes the setting display unit 197 to display the set value stored in the setting memory (step S111).

After that, the main control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the operating state of the setting key switch 100q is in the off state (step S112). If NO is determined in step S5 of FIG. 32 and the setting key switch 100q remains in the ON state (NO in step S112), the process returns to step S111, the process is repeated, and the display of the set value is continued. On the other hand, when the setting key is returned to the original state and the setting key switch 100q is turned off (YES in step S112), the setting display unit 197 is turned off so that the set value cannot be visually recognized (hidden) (step). S113), return. As described above, after the return, the process of step S10 of FIG. 32 is performed.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment has a frame opening, which is the first procedure, as a condition for shifting to the above-mentioned setting change processing and setting confirmation processing, in order to enhance security. Therefore, although not shown in FIG. 32, when the operation state of the setting key switch 100q in step S5 is determined to be on (YES in step 5), the frame open switch (door open sensor 2p) is in the state. Also check, and only when the frame is in the open state (door open), the process proceeds to step S6. Even if the setting key switch 100q is in the ON state at the time of determination in step S5, if the frame is not in the open state (door closed), an illegality or abnormality is suspected. Therefore, the setting change process (step). The process does not proceed to step S6, which proceeds to S7) or the setting confirmation process (step S8), but waits until the setting key switch 100q is turned off, and when the setting key switch 100q is switched to the off state, the process proceeds to step S9.

<Main control side timer interrupt processing>
Next, the relationship of each figure for explaining the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. First, FIGS. 37 and 38 are flowcharts showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed on the main control board 100, respectively. 39 and 40 are flowcharts showing the details of the start port monitoring control process shown in FIG. 37, respectively. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process shown in FIG. 38, and FIGS. 42 and 43 are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process shown in FIG. 41, respectively. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control process shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing shown in FIG. 44. 46 to 50 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol change start process, the special symbol change process, and the special symbol stop symbol display process shown in FIG. 45, respectively. 51 to 53 are flowcharts showing details of the special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. 38, respectively.

First, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 is executed by interrupting the main control side main process when a timer interrupt is generated in response to a clock pulse at regular time intervals (for example, 4 ms) from the CTC circuit described above. To. The terms "conditional device" and "continuous operation device for accessories" used below mean a conceptual control device. The "condition device" is activated when a big hit occurs in a special symbol game, and the "feature continuous actuating device" is capable of continuously actuating the "special electric accessory" a plurality of times.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main control CPU 101 (data used during the processing of the main control side main processing) are saved in the stack area of the main control RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation conditions are set. Set (step S51). Next, the interrupt operation condition setting value is set in the interrupt control register (step S52). Next, the clear word 2 is set (step S53).

Next, the clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set in order to restart the watchdog timer (step S54). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by writing the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 in order to the WDT clear register of the main control CPU 101 within the preset timeout time. That is, when the main control CPU 101 normally executes the main control program, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before the time-out. Become. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input process is executed (step S55). In this input process, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first start port switch 161 and the second start port switch 162, the operation gate switch 163, the grand prize opening switch 164, and the out ball detection switch 167, as well as the door open switch, the frame open switch, and the back set open switch (not shown). , The input information of the magnetic sensor, the radio wave sensor, etc. is read, the state of them is determined, and then these detection information is stored.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (step S56). In this various random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number that do not use the initial value random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the numerical value of the random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

Next, the initial value update type random number update process is executed (step S57). In this initial value update type random number update process, a random number per ordinary symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. When the value of the counter makes one round (when it becomes the value set as the initial value), the value of the initial value random number corresponding to the random number value of the counter which makes one round at the relevant timing is set as a new initial value. To do.

Next, the initial value random number update process is executed (step S58). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the predetermined maximum value for each random number, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value.

Next, the timer subtraction process is executed (step S59). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the game machine are subtracted and updated. The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, a timer for controlling the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, and the like. , Ordinary symbols, timers used for various controls such as ordinary electric accessories are included.

Next, the second start port validity period setting process is executed (step S60). In this second starting port valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 62 are determined, and as the determination result, the valid period data or the invalid period data of the second starting port 62 is set.

Next, the winning monitoring process is executed (step S61). In this winning monitoring process, the first starting port switch 161, the second starting port switch 162, the operating gate switch 163, the large winning port switch 164, the general winning port switch 166, and the out ball in the above-mentioned input process (step S55). Based on the detection information of the detection switch 167, the switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed, and as a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the effect control including the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch. Make a command transmission request, etc.

Next, the prize ball control process is executed (step S62). In this prize ball control process, it is determined whether the prize is valid or invalid, and a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type, and the payout control is performed. The data received from the board 400 is monitored and the communication inspection with the payout control board 400 is performed.

Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (step S63). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the gate 63 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 63, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation hold ball information, and the maximum The number of balls on hold for operation is updated up to a maximum of four, and random numbers related to the normal symbol lottery are stored.

Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (step S64). In this normal symbol control process, since a series of processes related to the normal symbol display device 175 or the normal electric accessory 622 is executed, the normal symbol changing process and the normal symbol stop symbol are being displayed according to the value of the normal symbol game status. Processing, processing during operation of ordinary electric accessory, processing during demonstration of termination of operation of ordinary electric accessory, etc. are executed. In the processing during the change of the normal symbol, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable display or a definite display.

Next, the normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (step S65). In this normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process, when the operating state of the normal symbol is monitored and it is determined that the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, one normal symbol operation pending ball number is digested and the normal symbol is activated. The hit / fail judgment, the symbol judgment, the fluctuation pattern judgment, the fluctuation time setting, and the like are performed in order.

Next, the start port monitoring control process is executed (step S66). In this start port monitoring control process, the entry of the game ball into the first start port 61 and the second start port 62 is monitored, and when it is detected that the game ball has entered, for example, the number of reserved balls The command request of the command including the information necessary for the effect control board 200 such as the update, the random number storage related to the special symbol lottery, the pre-judgment for the pre-reading notice, the number of symbol storages, etc. is performed in order.

Next, the special symbol control process is executed (step S67). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, for example, a special symbol variation start process described later (see step S420 of FIG. 45 described later) according to the value of the special symbol game status. , The special symbol changing process (see step S430 in FIG. 45, which will be described later) and the special symbol stop symbol display process (see step S440 in FIG. 45, which will be described later) are executed.

Next, the special electric accessory control process is executed (step S68). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", the operation start and end of the special electric accessory 642 are set as the operation process related to the special electric accessory 642, and the operation is large. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 64 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability fluctuation function, the operation start setting of the fluctuation time shortening function, the setting of the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the like are executed in order.

Next, the large winning opening validity period setting process is executed (step S69). In this large winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the large winning opening 64 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the large winning opening 64 is set as the determination result.

Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (step S70). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, when there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserved ball is digested, a command request for the number of symbol storage numbers, and a judgment as to whether the special symbol is correct or not. , Design determination of special symbol, determination of probability fluctuation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric accessory, setting of demo production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, the abnormality detection process is executed (step S71). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the above-mentioned input process (step S55), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. Then, it is determined whether or not the game machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is generated in order to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

Next, the ball entry passage time abnormality detection process is executed (step S72). In this ball entry passage time abnormality detection process, when the on signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball entry passage time abnormality is set and the effect control command (“error”) including the error information is set. In addition to requesting the effect designation command "), it also requests the output of a security signal to be output to the external terminal.

Next, the game status display process is executed (step S73). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 642 is continuously operated (specified number of rounds), the number of balls on hold for normal symbols and special symbols is created. Display data for displaying the error state information detected by the above-mentioned abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, the steering wheel status signal inspection process is executed (step S74). In this steering wheel status signal inspection process, the steering wheel status signal is inspected.

Next, the LED output process is executed (step S75). In this LED output process, the above-mentioned special symbol control process (step S85) is performed in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, display an error, and the like. , The display data created by the abnormality detection process (step S89), the game state display process (step S73), and the like are displayed on the special symbol display devices 171 and 172, the normal symbol display device 175, and the special symbol hold lamps 173 and 174. In addition to outputting to the normal drawing hold lamp 176, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, the display on these various display devices is initialized.

Next, the launch control signal output process is executed (step S76). In this launch control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to launch the game ball. On the other hand, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the launch of the game ball.

Next, the test signal output process is executed (step S77). In this test signal output processing, error inspection processing is performed after creating various test data, and when an error is detected as a result, various test data are output to each test signal output port.

Next, the solenoid output process is executed (step S78). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate the ordinary electric accessory 622 and the special electric accessory 642, each of them is based on the control data acquired in the ordinary symbol control process (step S82) and the special electric accessory control process (step S86). An excitation signal is output to the electric accessory solenoids 123 and 124.

Next, the effect control command transmission process is executed (step S79). In this effect control command transmission process, as described above, among the effect control commands stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180, the effect control command stored in the ring buffer designated by the pointer is converted into MODE data and the effect control command. Each EVENT data is read out and transmitted to the effect control board 200 as described later.

Next, the external information output process is executed (step S80). In this external information output processing, the operating state information of the game machine is output as external information to an external device such as a hall computer or a data counter via the external terminal board.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main control CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (step S81). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

When the main control board 100 detects a power outage (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold value) during the main control side main processing or interrupt processing, a non-masqueradable interrupt is generated and the power off confirmation flag is turned on. To do. After returning to the original processing, the power-off processing (steps S27 to S33) described above is executed.

<Special symbol game processing>
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described. The processes related to the special symbol game include the above-mentioned start port monitoring control process (step S84), special symbol control process (step S85), special electric accessory control process (step S86), and special symbol variation start monitoring control process (step). S88) is applicable.

<Starting port monitoring control process>
First, as shown in FIG. 39, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 61 is detected (step S201). When it is detected that a game ball has entered the first starting port 61, it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S202).

When the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol is less than 4, the lottery random number values related to the first special symbol game include a random value per special symbol, a random value per special symbol, and a random value of a special symbol variation pattern. Is acquired, and each random value is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (step S203). As an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the first special symbol is added by 1 (step S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 61 is completed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 62 is detected (step S205). When the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 62 is detected, it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S206). When the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol is less than 4, the random number value per special symbol, the symbol random value per special symbol, and the random value of the special symbol variation pattern are acquired as the lottery random number values related to the second special symbol game. Then, each random value is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area (hold n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the ball entry order (step S207). As an update of the number of balls on hold for operation of the second special symbol, the value of the number of balls on hold for the second special symbol is added by 1 (step S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 62 is completed.

Next, whether or not the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in step S204 or step S208. It is determined whether or not (step S209). When the number of operation-holding balls is updated (step S209), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the command storage area of (step S210).

Next, the state of the game machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (step S211). When it is the pre-determination timing (step S211), the random number value per special symbol is read from the hit random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the pre-determination of success or failure is performed (step S212). A pass / fail pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S213).

The symbol random number value per special symbol is read from the hit symbol random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the symbol pre-determination is performed (step S214). A symbol pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer in the reserved n storage area, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (step S216). A fluctuation pattern pre-determination command including the information of the pre-determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S217).

<Special symbol change start monitoring control processing>
In the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process (step S88) shown in FIG. 41, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol side that satisfies the variation start condition is set to the special symbol described later. The fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, as described above, the processing on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as an example.

First, it is determined whether or not the hit is a big hit or a small hit (step S301). Next, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for fluctuation)". It is determined whether or not (step S302).

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0" (step S303), and if the number of reserved balls is not "0", the fluctuation start condition of the second special symbol is After assuming that it is established and setting the address of the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and address of the RAM storage area) (step S304), the second special symbol side The process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (step S310). That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested regardless of the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the first special symbol. To. The details of this special symbol change start monitoring process will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls for operation of the second special symbol is "0", it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for operation of the first special symbol is "0" (step S305). Here, if the number of reserved balls is not "0", it is considered that the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (various tables used in the subsequent processing). After setting (the address of the above and the address of the RAM storage area) (step S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310) on the first special symbol side.

If the fluctuation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not satisfied (steps S301, S302, S305), the execution of the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (step S310) is omitted.

<Special symbol change start monitoring process>
In the special symbol change start monitoring process (step S310), the change start of this time is started by referring to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in step S304 or step S306 described above. Execute the processing on the target special symbol side. Since the processing contents are almost the same between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, it is the processing on the first special symbol side or the processing on the second special symbol side, except in special cases. I will explain them all together without distinguishing whether they exist or not.

First, as shown in FIG. 42, the number of operation-holding balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the start of the fluctuation this time, is subtracted by 1 (step S311). A symbol storage number command including information on the number of balls on hold for operation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S312). Next, access the special symbol hold storage area on the special symbol side that is the target of this fluctuation start, and the random value per special symbol stored in the earliest reserved storage area (hold 1 storage area), per special symbol. The symbol random value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are read out in order, and these random values are used for the special symbol hit / fail determination process (step S320), the symbol determination process (step S330), and the variation pattern selection process (described later in FIG. 46). For use in step S423), the data is transferred to the special symbol hit / miss determination area, the special symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (step S313). As the update of the hold storage area, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is sequentially shifted to the hold 1 storage area to the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S314). ..

Next, the special symbol hit / miss determination process is executed (step S320). In the special symbol winning / failing determination process, first, the special symbol winning / failing lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the game state is the special symbol probability change state, the high-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired, and if the gaming state is the normal state, the low-probability winning / losing lottery table is acquired. Next, the random value per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / fail determination area of the main information storage means 180. With reference to the special symbol winning / failing lottery table, the winning / failing judgment of the special symbol is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. The values corresponding to the hit / fail determination result (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, loss data “00H”) are stored as special symbol determination flags of the main information storage means 180.

Next, the symbol determination process is executed (step S330). In the symbol determination process, the stop symbol of the special symbol, the type of the symbol group, and the character effect number (variable additional symbol information) are determined according to the result of the hit / fail determination. The stop symbol of the special symbol determined this time, the type of the symbol group, and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is the type of the determined symbol group (7 patterns of the symbol groups A to G) and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the normal symbol (probability change on of the special symbol / probability change off of the special symbol). / One of 28 patterns in total is determined based on the combination with the probability variation on of the normal symbol / the probability variation off of the normal symbol). If the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination corresponds to a small hit (step S341), and whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination corresponds to a big hit (step S342). If the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S346, while if the result of the hit / fail judgment is wrong, the process proceeds to step S349.

On the other hand, if the result of the winning / failing determination is a big hit, whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol as the gaming state after the special game based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in step S330. (Step S343). That is, when the type of the symbol group (big hit type) indicates a specific symbol, it is determined to add the probability variation function, and the probability variation operation data (ST number of times) is stored in the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180. ) While storing "64H", when the type of the symbol group indicates a normal symbol, it is decided not to add the probability fluctuation function, and the probability fluctuation inactive data "00H" is stored in the probability fluctuation count counter. (Step S344). This determination result is stored in the probability fluctuation determination flag of the main information storage means 180.

Based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in step S330, the number of times the variable time shortening function is operated is determined as the game state after the special game (step S345), and the number of times the electric chew support function is operated is determined. (Step S346). This determination result (information on the number of times the variable time shortening function is operated (hereinafter referred to as "information on the number of times the variable time is shortened") and information on the number of times the electric chew support function is operated (hereinafter referred to as "information on the number of times the ball is easily entered") are, respectively. It is stored in the time saving number storage area and the ball entry easy state number storage area of the corresponding main information storage means 180.

Next, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642 is set based on the type of the symbol group (large hit type, small hit type) determined in step S330 (step S347). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 642, the specified number of rounds of the round game (10 rounds, 5 rounds, 2 rounds in this embodiment), the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 64 (in this embodiment). , 30 seconds, 1.8 seconds) and so on.

Next, the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in step S330 and the current game state (step S348). In the above description, the special fluctuation state is determined according to the big hit symbol, but even in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern selection state can be changed to a special one in step S348. May be good. Next, returning to the flow, the demo production time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game is set based on the type of the symbol group determined in step S330 (step S349). Next, the special symbol hit / miss determination area and the special symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / miss determination process (step S320) and the symbol determination process (step S330) are cleared (step S351). The special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (waiting)" to "01H (start of change)" (step S351).

<Special symbol control processing>
Next, the special symbol control process (step S85) shown in FIG. 44 will be described. First, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (step S401). Next, when the special electric accessory 642 is not operating (step S401), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (step S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)", the second special symbol control table (addresses and RAM storage of various tables used in the subsequent processing) is stored in order to execute the process related to the second special symbol. The area address) is set (step S403), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)", the first special symbol control table (addresses of various tables used in the subsequent processing) is executed in order to execute the process related to the first special symbol. And the address of the RAM storage area) (step S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410).

In the special symbol control general-purpose processing described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in step S403 or step S404 described above is used, and the special subject to this variation is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed, but since the processing method is the same for the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, is it the processing on the first special symbol side except in special cases? , The second special symbol side processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing will be described later.

<Special symbol control general-purpose processing>
In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (step S410) shown in FIG. 45, branch processing (steps S411 to steps) for shifting to the processing according to the value of the special symbol game status (“01H”, “02H”, “03H”). S414) is executed. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of this change is not 0 (step S411). When the special symbol game status is not "00H" (step S411), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (start of fluctuation)" (step S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H", the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start process (step S420). The details of this special symbol variation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 46, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the special symbol game status is not "01H" in step S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (step S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H", the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (step S430). The details of this special symbol change processing will be described with reference to FIG. 47, which will be described later. If the special symbol game status is not "02H" in step S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (step S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H", the process proceeds to the process of displaying the special symbol stop symbol (step S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display processing will be described with reference to FIG. 48, which will be described later.

<Special symbol change start processing>
First, as shown in FIG. 46, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / losing lottery, the winning symbol, the number of holdings, the type of the special symbol, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (step S421). Next, the special symbol variation pattern random value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (step S422). With reference to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random value (step S423).

Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (step S424). As a setting for starting the variation of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 155 (step S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (step S426). As the variation start command, the variation pattern designation command and the symbol designation command are sequentially generated in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, and these are stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

Next, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (step S427). The special symbol game status is changed from "01H (start of fluctuation)" to "02H (during fluctuation)" (step S428).

<Processing during special symbol change>
First, as shown in FIG. 47, in order to display the variation of the special symbol, the display pattern number switching process of the special symbol is executed (step S431). In this display pattern number switching process, the display pattern number data of the special symbol is updated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 in the LED output process (step S76) in order to display the special symbol in a variable or definite manner, and is predetermined. In the special symbol display device that is changing every switching time, a specific display unit blinks or individual LEDs of the display unit are sequentially turned on to perform a display indicating that the display is changing.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has expired (step S432). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends, the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed is set in the first special symbol display device 171 or the second special symbol display device 172 (step S433). Next, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S434).

Next, the special symbol game timer stores "125", which is data corresponding to 500 ms as the fixed display time (step S435). The "fixed display time" is a time for definitively stopping and displaying the stopped symbol when the special symbol is stopped fluctuating. The special symbol game status is changed from "02H (changing)" to "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (step S436).

<Processing during special symbol stop symbol display>
First, as shown in FIG. 48, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the final display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has expired (step S441). ). Here, when the final display time of the special symbol ends, the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (stop symbol display)" to "00H (standby)" (step S442).

Next, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the jackpot data “55H” (step S443). When the hit / fail determination data is jackpot data, the operation stop of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (step S444), the operation stop of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol (step S445), and the operation stop of the electric chew support function (step S446). , In order.

Next, as the start demo setting process of the special game, the start demo display time is set and an effect control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (step S447). Next, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (step S448). The special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "01H (special game)" (step S449). “00H” is set in order to clear the contents of the pass / fail determination flag (step S450).

On the other hand, when the hit / fail determination data is not the jackpot data (step S443), it is determined whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating (step S451). As shown in FIG. 49, when the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating (step S451), the probability fluctuation counter of the main information storage means 180 is set to 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time. Subtract (step S452). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation number counter is zero (step S453). When the probability fluctuation number counter is zero, the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is stopped (step S454). On the other hand, if the probability fluctuation counter after subtraction is not zero, step S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating (step S455). When the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol is operating, the time reduction counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S456). Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is zero (step S457). When the time reduction counter is zero, it is assumed that the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (step S458). On the other hand, if the time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero, step S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chew support function is operating (step S459). When the electric chew support function is operating, the counter for the number of easy entry states of the main information storage means 180 is subtracted by 1 as the digestion of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time (step S460). Next, it is determined whether or not the ball entry ease state counter is zero (step S461). When the ball entry easy state count counter is zero, the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped as if the number of times the ball entry easy state ends has been reached (step S462). On the other hand, if the counter for the number of easy entry states after subtraction is not zero, step S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S463.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180 is decremented by 1 (step S463). The variation pattern selection state is updated (step S464). Specifically, the number of times of the fluctuation pattern selection state of the main information storage means 180 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current fluctuation pattern selection state has reached the preset number of ends, and the number of ends is set to the number of ends. If it has been reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state specified next. On the other hand, if the number of ends has not been reached, the current fluctuation pattern selection state is maintained.

Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and fluctuation pattern selection state information updated in steps S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this is used as a command of the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the storage area (step S465). On the effect control board 200 side, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (step S466). When the small hit data is stored, as the start demo setting process of the small hit game, the start demo display time is set and the effect control command (small hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated. (Step S467). Next, the special electric accessory game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "02H (small hit game)" (step S468). “00H” is set to clear the contents of the pass / fail determination flag (step S469).

On the other hand, when the small hit data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag, that is, when the deviation data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, the execution of steps S467 to S469 is omitted. When the special symbol determination flag is out-of-order data, the processing for clearing the content of the flag is not performed because "00H" is originally stored as out-of-order data.

<Special electric accessory control process>
First, as shown in FIG. 51, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "01H (special game: big hit)" (step S501). When the special electric accessory game status is "01H", the special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is operating (step S502). When the special electric accessory 642 is not operating, it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 642 (step S503). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 642 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started in each round game.

When it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 642, an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (step S504). ). The effect control board 200 side executes a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). The operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started (step S505), and the processes of steps S506 to S510 are executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 642.

As a process during operation of the special electric accessory 642, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of winning balls have entered the large winning opening 64 (step S506), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 642 (opening time). ) Has passed (step S507). At this time, when the game balls enter the large winning opening 64 by the maximum number of winning balls or when the operating time of the special electric accessory 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is stopped (step S508). It is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642 has reached a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (step S509). When the number of continuous operations does not reach the specified number of rounds, the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642 is added by 1 (step S510).

On the other hand, when the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 642 has reached the specified number of rounds, the process proceeds to step S511 shown in FIG. , Generate an effect control command (big hit end demo command) instructing the start of the end demo effect (step S511).

Next, the probability fluctuation number information set in step S344 is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter (step S512). The fluctuation time reduction count information set in step S345 is stored in the time reduction counter (step S513). The information on the number of easy-to-enter states set in step S346 is stored in the easy-to-enter state counter (step S514).

Next, with reference to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in step S343, it is determined whether or not the probability variation number information stored in the probability variation number counter is the probability variation function data (“64H”). (Step S515). When the probability fluctuation number information is the probability fluctuation function data, the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started (step S516). On the other hand, when the probability fluctuation number information is not the probability fluctuation function data (when step S515 is NO), the execution of step S516 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction counter is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (step S517). In the case of the fluctuation time shortening function operation data, the operation of the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol is started (step S518). On the other hand, if it is not the fluctuation time shortening function operation data, the execution of step S518 is omitted.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ball entry easy state count information stored in the ball entry easy state count counter is the electric chew support function operation data (data other than "00H") (step S519). In the case of the electric chew support function operation data, the operation of the electric chew support function is started (steps S520 to S522). That is, the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol is started (step S520), the operation of the function for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is started (step S521), and the operation of the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 622 is started (step S522). Execute. On the other hand, if it is not the electric chew support function operation data, the execution of steps S520 to S522 is omitted.

Next, the variable pattern selection state determined in step S347 is switched to (step S523). Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in steps S512 to S523 described above is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means 180. It is stored in the command storage area of (step S524). The effect control board 200 side sets the effect mode after the special game based on the information of the game state designation command. The special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for hit)" (step S525).

On the other hand, if the special electric accessory game status is not "01H" (step S501), the process proceeds to step S530 and whether or not the special electric accessory game status is "02H (special game: small hit game)". (Step S530). When the special electric accessory game status is "02H", the small hit game process is executed in the subsequent processes.

In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 642 is operating (step S531). If the special electric accessory 642 is not operating, the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is started (step S532). On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 642 is in operation, the execution of step S532 is omitted.

Next, as a process during operation of the special electric accessory 642, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the large winning opening 64 by the maximum number of winnings (step S533), and the operating time of the special electric accessory 642 is determined. It is determined whether or not (opening time) has elapsed (step S534). At this time, when the game balls enter the large winning opening 64 by the maximum number of winning balls or when the operating time of the special electric accessory 642 has elapsed, the operation of the special electric accessory 642 is stopped (step S535).

Next, as the end demo setting process of the small hit game, the end demo display time is set and an effect control command (small hit end demo command) instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (step S536). Next, the variable pattern selection state determined in step S347 is switched to (step S537). Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in step S537 is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. (Step S538). This game state designation command is used on the effect control board 200 side, for example, to determine the transition trigger of the effect mode and to specify the effect mode of the transition destination. The special electric accessory game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (waiting for hit)" (step S539).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of processing on the effect control board 200 side will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 62. In the following, the production control program is mainly the main body, but the main body is omitted as appropriate. The processing on the effect control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the effect control CPU 201 is reset, such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt that is activated at regular intervals. It is activated when the processing, the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command executed when the strobe signal from the main control board 100 is received, and the arrival of the predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern. It includes a lamp effect interrupt process to be performed and a transmission interrupt process of an image control command that is activated at regular intervals.

For each interrupt process (exception process), a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur at the same time is set. In the present embodiment, "reset start processing by power reset (FIG. 54): highest priority", "reset start processing due to various abnormalities (FIG. 54): highest priority" → "reception interrupt processing of effect control command (FIG. 62)". : Level 7 "->" Reset start processing by WDT (when runaway is detected) (Fig. 54): Level 3 "->" Image control command transmission interrupt processing (Fig. 55): Level 2 "->" Effect control side timer interrupt processing (Fig. 54) FIG. 61): Priority levels are ranked in the order of "level 1" and the like. The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, when the effect control CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the effect control CPU 201 tries to access an illegal area or an illegal method, DMA (Direct Memory). Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

In the main processing on the effect control side, basically, the process proceeds after being set to either a state of prohibiting all interrupts or disabling interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, the main process is interrupted and each interrupt process is executed. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested (multiple interrupts occur) during the execution of the interrupt process, in principle, the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed. In addition, while the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the priority level is lower than the interrupt processing being executed or the interrupt processing has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process is processed in a state in which other interrupts having the same priority level or a lower priority level are disabled. Each interrupt process returns to the effect control side main process with all interrupts enabled. The priority order (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by the register setting of the interrupt controller described above.

<Reset start processing>
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, it is activated by any of a reset when the power is turned on, a reset caused by various abnormalities, and a reset caused by WDT (when runaway is detected), and after the security check of the effect control CPU 201 is performed. , The program starts, and the processing after step S801 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, the start address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (step S801). All interrupt processing is disabled until various initial settings are completed (step S802).

Next, as a basic setting related to the hardware, an initial value is set in the built-in register provided in the effect control CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (step S803). Further, the memory area in the effect control RAM 203 is initialized (step S804). Here, the initial value is set for the variable with the initial value, and the variable without the initial value is initialized by clearing 0. The effect control CPU 201 appropriately develops the control program stored in the effect control ROM 202 into the effect control RAM 203.

Next, interrupts other than the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command are prohibited (step S805). Next, among various errors set in advance for each model, a process of setting the type of error to be valid for the model is executed (step S806). Further, a request to turn off the effect lamps 10 and 25 (frame lamp 10, board lamp 25) is made to turn off all the lights (step S807). The watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the effect control CPU 201 (step S808).

Next, the effect control side main process is executed (step S809). The details of the main processing on the effect control side will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In addition, when the process shifts to the main process on the effect control side in step S809 described above, it is usually impossible to return to the reset start process, but due to the occurrence of a program bug or the like, the reset start process has been restored. In this case, the mode shifts to the low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

<Main processing on the production control side>
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect control side main process (step S809) shown in FIG. 54.

First, the address (the start address where the effect control program is expanded) for starting the check whether or not the effect control program is accurately expanded in the effect control RAM 203 in the effect control side main process is acquired (step S811). ). Next, all interrupts are permitted, that is, various interrupt processes are permitted to be activated (step S812).

Next, the device initialization operation is executed (step S813). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the game machine is turned on (at the start of reset), and is necessary for controlling the operation of the movable accessory by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

Next, the watchdog timer is cleared in order to restart the watchdog timer (step S814). At this time, when the effect control CPU 201 normally executes the effect program, the watchdog timer is written by writing a predetermined clear word to the WDT clear register of the effect control CPU 201 within the preset time-out time. Is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

Next, the input port check process is executed (step S815). In this input port check process, the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) is read every time an interrupt occurs in the port input / output process (step S1112) in the effect control side timer interrupt process (see FIG. 61) described later. As a result of monitoring and monitoring multiple times (for example, 4 times), if all the input port states are "1", the signal level is changed to "1 (H level)" and all the input port states are "0". In the case of, the signal level is changed to "0 (L level)", and if the state of the input port is other than that, the signal level is not changed (the input signal is confirmed by this).

Next, the error effect management process is executed (step S816). In this error effect management process, error effect by various devices is started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (step S1120) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

Next, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (step S817). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button advance effect is incorporated during the symbol variation, the input state of the effect button 15 within the operation effective time is monitored, and a plurality of preset effect buttons are set according to the button advance effect. From the seeds of the effect content, the content of the effect according to the input state of the effect button 15 is determined. The button input operation itself by the player is monitored in the port input process (step S1112) in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and in the effect button monitoring control process, a flag regarded as a button effective operation and an effect switch are performed. It is determined whether or not the flag for is satisfied, and the execution control of the effect based on the button press is performed.

Next, the advance notice lottery management process is executed (step S818). In this advance notice lottery management process, the advance notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the advance notice effect that occurs at each stage of the change process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (step S820). (Notice production number) will be decided by lottery. The advance notice effect number determined here is temporarily stored in the advance notice effect number storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. An image control command for designating the advance notice effect number on the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the effect control information storage means 260. At this time, when the character advance notice effect pattern (character advance notice effect number) is selected as the advance notice effect pattern, a character request is generated, and in the subsequent device management process (step S819), the movable character is movable. Drive pattern is specified. In this embodiment, all of the plurality of types of advance notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn by lottery within one main loop process, but the main loop processing efficiency is determined. In order to improve it, it is divided into each time when the advance notice effect occurs (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, the fluctuation stop stage, and the effective operation of the effect button 15), and the lottery is performed over a plurality of main loop processes. It has become. At that time, since it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the change of the decorative symbol (immediately send the image control command) for the advance notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the change of the decorative symbol, a lottery is performed in the above-mentioned main loop process. Execute.

Next, the device management process is executed (step S819). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (step S820) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern) stored in the effect control ROM 202 , Drive pattern), the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, accessory notice effect number) is specified, and the control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamps 10 and 25, the lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In the present embodiment, the one-frame time corresponds to the time required for the one-frame drawing process when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory, the drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. Become. On the other hand, when all the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completed in the effect control side timer interrupt process described later, the effect lamps 10 and 25 are turned off or the operation of the movable accessory is stopped. And end the control of the target device.

Next, the command analysis process (step S820) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this effect control command is read out and this effect control command is read out. Executes the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command. The details of this command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. 56, which will be described later.

It is determined whether or not analysis (hereinafter referred to as “command analysis”) has been executed for the effect control command during the loop process of the effect main process of the current cycle (step S821). When command analysis is being executed, the process returns to step S814, and steps S814 to S821 are repeatedly executed. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed, the effect lottery random number update process is executed (step S822). In this effect lottery random number update process, the effect lottery random numbers such as the look-ahead advance notice lottery random number, the decorative symbol random number, the variable effect pattern random number, and the advance notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is added by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

<Command analysis processing>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the details of the command analysis process (step S820) shown in FIG. 55. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command held in the output port on the main control board 100 is captured in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 as shown below, and the effect control command is used. Is captured and stored, the effect control process corresponding to the type of this effect control command is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not the game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S831). When the game state designation command is stored, the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (step S832). In this effect state transition process, a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state specification command. The details of this effect state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. 57, which will be described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S833). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol memory number command and a pre-determination command. When this hold-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the hold information management process (step S834). In this hold information management process, the symbol storage number command or the pre-judgment command is read from the effect control information storage means 260, the pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the hold display unit of the effect display device 70 (FIG. A process for updating the display number and display mode (display color, etc.) of the reserved image displayed in (not shown) is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S835). Here, the symbol fluctuation-related commands include a fluctuation start command and a fluctuation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored, the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (step S836). In this variation effect content determination process, when the received symbol variation-related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the symbol variation effect is executed, and when the received symbol variation-related command is a variation stop command. Executes a process for terminating the symbol variation effect being executed. The details of this variation effect content determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 58, which will be described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S837). Here, the jackpot production-related commands include a jackpot start demo production command, a round production designation command, and a jackpot end demo production command. When the jackpot effect related command is stored, the process proceeds to the jackpot effect content determination process (step S838). In this jackpot effect content determination process, processing for executing the start demo effect, the round effect, and the end demo effect is executed. The details of the jackpot effect content determination process will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, which will be described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the small hit effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S839). Here, the small hit effect-related commands include a small hit start demo effect command and a small hit end demo effect command. When the command related to the small hit effect is stored, the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination process (step S840). In this small hit effect content determination process, processing for executing the small hit start demo effect and the small hit end demo effect is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S841). When this error effect specification command is stored, the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (step S842). In this error effect content determination process, an error effect designation command is read from the effect control information storage means 260, and an error effect is notified by the image display of the effect display device 70, the light emission mode of the effect lamps 10 and 25, and the like. Determine the pattern.

If the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S831, S833, S835, S837, S839, and S841, the command analysis process ends. Since the loop processing (steps S814 to S822) of the main processing on the effect control side is synchronized with the image display cycle (1 frame = 16 ms) of the image control CPU 301, the command analysis process of step S821 and the effect lottery of step S822 The random number update process is repeatedly executed, and if it exceeds 16 ms, the process is returned to step S814.

<Production state transition process>
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the details of the effect state transition process (step S832) shown in FIG. 56.

First, the content of the game state designation command from the main control board 100 is analyzed, and the information regarding the variation pattern selection state included in the content of this command is acquired (step S901). Next, based on the information regarding the variation pattern selection state acquired in step S901, it is determined whether or not the transition mode transition trigger has arrived (step S902). When the opportunity to shift to the effect mode has arrived, the transition to the predetermined effect mode is set in step S903 or later. In principle, the transition of the production mode is linked with the probability fluctuation function after the end of the special game, the fluctuation time shortening function, the operation of the electric chew support function, and the transition trigger of the fluctuation pattern selection state. For example, at the end of a special game or when the end number of times of the variable pattern selection state has expired. The final number of fluctuation pattern selection states is the number of times related to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.

First, it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α (step S903). When the transition destination is the low-probability normal fluctuation state α, the normal effect mode Mα is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (step S904). When the mode shifts to the normal effect mode Mα, the normal background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S905). In the normal effect mode Mα, a normal background image representing, for example, “wilderness” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, when the transition destination is not the low-probability normal fluctuation state α (step S903), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β (step S906). When the transition destination is the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β, the probability variation effect mode Mβ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (step S907). When the mode A shifts to the probability variation effect mode A, the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S908). In the probabilistic effect mode Mβ, from the next symbol change, the effect display device 70 displays, for example, a probabilistic background image representing a “fortress”.

When the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is not the high-probability time-saving fluctuation state β (step S906), it is determined whether or not the transition destination of the fluctuation pattern selection state is the high-probability special fluctuation state γ (step S909). ). When the transition destination is the high-probability special fluctuation state γ, the special effect mode Mγ is set as the transition destination of the effect mode (step S910). Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S911). The special continuous effect flag is a flag that is turned on when the special continuous effect is executed. When the special continuous effect flag is on, the special background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S912). In the special effect mode Mγ, a special background image representing, for example, a “starry sky” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. On the other hand, when the special continuous effect flag is off, the probability variation background data number is set in the background data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S913). In the special effect mode Mγ, a probability variation background image (substantially the same background image as in the probability variation effect mode Mβ) representing, for example, a “fortress” is displayed on the effect display device 70 from the next symbol variation. Next, an image control command for instructing the display of the effect content (background image) determined in the process is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S921). Further, as the change of the effect mode, there is also a change determined on the effect control board 200 side, which is not due to the gaming state of the main control board 100. For example, when the normal gaming state (low probability / low base) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times on the main control board 100 side, or when a pre-reading lottery for executing a special effect mode is won, the power is turned on. For example, a timer value for measuring the elapsed time of the clock or a case where the RTC circuit is determined to have reached a predetermined time and a special effect is executed.

<Fluctuating production content determination process>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the details of the variation effect content determination process (step S836) shown in FIG. 56.

First, it is determined whether or not the variation start command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S931). If the variation start command is stored, the content of this variation start command (variation pattern specification command, variation addition symbol information specification command, character production number specification command) is analyzed, and the result of the winning / failing lottery included in the content of this command. , The symbol group, the fluctuation pattern (variation time), the game state, and the like are acquired (step S932). The acquired information is stored in the variation effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260.

Next, the variation effect pattern selection process is executed (step S933). In this variation effect pattern selection process, the variation effect pattern table is acquired based on the variation pattern information acquired in step S932 and the effect mode set in the effect state transition process in step S832, and the effect lottery random number generation means. A random number value of the variation effect pattern is acquired from 210, and one of the variation effect patterns is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of variation effect patterns. The variation effect pattern constitutes a scenario of the effect display process in which the variation mode of the decorative pattern, the type / occurrence time of the reach effect, the type / occurrence time of the advance notice effect, and the like are defined. The variation effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the variation effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. A lamp effect number corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern number is requested, and the requested lamp effect number is set in the lamp request storage area of the effect control information storage means 260.

Next, the decorative symbol stop symbol selection process is executed (step S934). In this decorative symbol stop symbol selection process, a combination of stop symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) of the decorative symbol to be finally stopped is drawn based on the symbol group information and the variation pattern information acquired in step S932. To decide with. The decorative symbol combination number determined here is temporarily stored in the decorative symbol storage area of the effect control information storage means 260.

Next, as an update of the look-ahead information storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area to the hold 4 storage area is shifted to the lower hold storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is changed. Clear to zero (step S935).

Based on the effect information acquired in steps S933 to S935, an image control command (variation effect start command) required for starting the variation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is stored in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. Set (step S939).

On the other hand, when the fluctuation start command is not stored (step S931), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S940). When the variable stop command is stored (step S940), the content of the variable stop command is analyzed and the symbol stop information included in the content of this command is acquired (step S941). An image control command (variation effect stop command) required to stop the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S942).

<Big hit production content determination process>
59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the details of the jackpot effect content determination process (step S836) shown in FIG. 56.

First, it is determined whether or not the start demo command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1001). When the start demo command is stored, the content of the start demo command is analyzed, and information indicating the jackpot type and the like included in the content of this command is acquired (step S1002). This acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, the number of consecutive villas counter for counting the number of consecutive villas is updated (step S1003). Specifically, if the jackpot this time is a jackpot in the normal state (referred to as "first hit"), set "1" to the consecutive villa count counter, and if it is a consecutive villa, set the consecutive villa count counter to "1". 1 ”add.

Next, a jackpot effect pattern selection process for determining the contents of the jackpot effect pattern (start demo effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demo effect pattern) is executed (step S1004). In this jackpot effect pattern selection process, a jackpot effect pattern table (not shown) is acquired, and a jackpot effect pattern random number value is acquired from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and one of a plurality of types of jackpot effect patterns is obtained. The production pattern is decided by lottery. The jackpot effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. The jackpot effect pattern number includes, for example, a start demo pattern number, a round effect pattern number, and an end demo pattern number.

Next, the pending villa production determination process is executed (step S1005). In this hold inner ream effect determination process, when there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the game state (especially the probability change game state) after the end of the big hit in the hold that exists when the big hit game is executed, the hold inner ream When it is determined whether or not the villa effect can be executed and it is decided to execute the pending villa effect, the special continuous effect flag is turned on and the villa effect pattern is selected.

Next, the jackpot effect replacement process is executed (step S1006). In this jackpot production replacement process, when the pending villa production (special continuous production) is executed, the normal start demo production pattern and the normal end demo production pattern are changed to the special start demo production pattern and the special end demo production pattern. Replace. In addition, in this embodiment, the target of the look-ahead determination in the hold-in-ream villa production exists at the start time of the special game (at the end of the fluctuation) when the preceding operation hold ball becomes a big hit. It is a subsequent operation hold ball. Therefore, even if the operation hold ball generated during the special game is a specific hold, the hold inner consecutive villa effect determination process (step S1005) and the replacement process (step S1006) are not executed, but during the special game. When a specific hold occurs, the hold inner consecutive villa effect determination process and the replacement process may be executed even during the special game, and the jackpot effect data set at the start of the special game may be replaced.

The start demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 is transferred to the start demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260, and the start demo effect is produced. Set the start of (step S1007).

Next, it is determined whether or not the round effect designation command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1011). When the round effect designation command is stored (step S1007), the content of the round effect designation command is analyzed, and information indicating the number of rounds included in the content of this command and the number of winnings in the large winning opening 64 is displayed. Acquire (step S1012). This acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, based on the information acquired in step S1012, the round number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1013), and the large prize number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 is updated (step S1014). .. In the present embodiment, "14" prize balls are paid out every time a game ball enters the large prize opening 64. Therefore, by multiplying the number of winnings in the large winning opening 64 by "14", The number of prize balls won is calculated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1015). The pseudo count flag is a flag that is turned on when a pseudo count effect is executed in which the number of rounds and the number of prize balls won in the previous special game is added to the number of rounds and the number of prize balls won in the later special game to notify the player. Is. When the pseudo count flag is on, that is, when the round effect (pseudo count effect) in the subsequent big hit is scheduled to be executed, the round number pseudo addition process is executed (step S1016). In this round number pseudo addition process, the number of round game executions (round number: 10R) executed in the previous special game is added to the number of round game executions (round number: 1R to 10R) stored in the round number counter. to add. As a result, in the special continuous production, the first round game in the later special game is notified as the eleventh round game.

Next, the pseudo-addition process for the number of winning prize balls is executed (step S1017). In this pseudo-addition process of the number of winning prize balls, the number of winnings to the large winning opening in the previous special game is added to the number of winnings stored in the large winning number counter. As a result, in the special continuous production, the number of prize balls acquired in the later special game is notified as the total number of prize balls acquired in the earlier special game and the later special game.

The round effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 is stored in the rounds of the effect control information storage means 260 together with the numerical values of the round number counter and the big prize number counter. Transfer to the effect storage area to set the start of the round effect (step S1018).

Next, it is determined whether or not the end demo command is stored in the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1021). When the end demo command is stored, the content of the end demo command is analyzed and the information included in the content of this command is acquired (step S1022). This acquired information is stored in the jackpot effect content determination area of the effect control information storage means 260. Next, it is determined whether or not the special continuous effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1023), and it is determined whether or not to execute the hold inner consecutive villa effect. When the special continuous effect flag is on, the value of the round number counter (the number of rounds) and the value of the big prize counter (the number of big prizes) are temporarily stored in the jackpot storage area ahead of the effect control information storage means 260. Store (step S1024). This means that if the current jackpot corresponds to the previous jackpot in the special continuous production, the final number of rounds and the number of big prizes in the previous jackpot will be the pseudo-addition process (steps S1016, S1017) in the later jackpot production. ), So it is stored as the record information of the previous special game. Therefore, in the pseudo addition process in steps S1016 and S1017, the numerical values (the number of rounds and the number of big prizes) stored in the big hit storage area will be added. Next, the round number counter and the large prize number counter of the effect control information storage means 260 are cleared (steps S1025 and S1026).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo count flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1027). If the pseudo-count flag is on, the pseudo-count flag is turned off (step S1028). Next, it is determined whether or not the hold inner consecutive villa effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is on (step S1035). When the hold inner consecutive villa effect flag is on, the hold inner consecutive villa effect flag of the effect control information storage means 260 is turned off (step S1036).

Next, the end demo effect pattern number temporarily stored in the jackpot effect pattern storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 in steps S1004 and S1006 is transferred to the end demo effect storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. End Set the start of the demo effect (step S1037). Based on the effect information acquired in steps S1005, S1007, S1018, and S1037, an image control command required for the jackpot effect is generated, and this image control command is set in the command storage area of the effect control information storage means 260 (step S1038). ..

<Timer interrupt processing on the production control side>
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing on the effect control side. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular time intervals, and is executed so as to interrupt the above-described effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the effect control CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the effect control RAM 203, and then the processes after step S1111 are sequentially executed. Within this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (step S1111).

Next, the port input / output process is executed (step S1112). In this port input / output process, the input data input process and the output data output process are executed using the I / O port circuit 204. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 are read and stored as input information. On the other hand, in the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the effect control information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204.

Next, the device control data output process is executed (step S1113). In this device control data output process, the drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (step S819) described above and set in the drive data storage area of the effect control information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, the effect timer update process is executed (step S1114). In this effect timer update process, the values of various effect timers used for the effect operation control are subtracted and updated by interrupt period (for example, 1 ms). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the advance notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the time such as the drive timing of the movable accessory and the lighting timing of the effect lamps 10 and 25 on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (step S1113) and the lamp data update process (step S1118) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Next, the button control timer update process is executed (step S1115). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated by the interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation effective time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is effective.

Next, the task control counter update process is executed (step S1117). In this task control counter update process, the task counter values (“0” to “15”) are updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", 1 is added, and if the value of the task counter is "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the lamp control task (lamp data update processing in step S1118) and the runaway monitoring task are assigned according to the value of the task counter. (Image CPU runaway monitoring process in step S1119), error management task (error management timer update process in step S1120), and other processes are executed. In the present embodiment, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values that are 8 ms apart from each other) are for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and one other value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match with the minimum unit 16 ms of the switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25. The minimum unit of the switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25 corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect is realized.

Next, the lamp data update process is executed (step S1118). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (step S819) described above and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamps 10 and 25. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as a serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data of the transmission buffer in 1-byte units and outputs each bit to the lamp connection board 91 in a manner synchronized with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, and all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The lamp data update process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (value indicating a lamp control task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117) described above (that is, at a cycle of 16 ms). It is a process to be executed).

Next, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (step S1119). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not change continuously for 800 to 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), image control is performed. It is determined that the image control CPU 301 of the board 300 is out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the image control CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time. The image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed when the task counter value reaches a predetermined value (value indicating an image monitoring task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117) described above. ..

Next, error management timer processing is executed (step S1120). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (step S817) described above is subtracted and updated. Note that this error management timer process is a process executed when the value of the task counter becomes a predetermined value (value indicating an error management task) in the task control counter update process (step S1117) described above. After enabling all interrupts and restoring the saved register contents, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side is terminated and the original processing before the interrupt is generated is restored.

<Transmission interrupt processing of image control command>
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of transmission interrupt processing of an image control command. The transmission interrupt process of this image control command occurs at preset fixed intervals (500 μs).

In the transmission interrupt process of this image control command, first, the image control command buffer of the effect control information storage means 260 is checked (step S1131). Next, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (step S1132), and it is determined whether or not the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (step S1133). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, a read pointer and a write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command is not stored. When the image control command is stored (step S1133), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (step S1134). This read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit (not shown) designated as the output destination (step S1135). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Next, the command data (command data stored in step S1135 described above) is cleared (step S1136). Next, the read pointer is added by 1 and updated (step S1137). The transmission interrupt processing of the image command is terminated, and the original processing before the interrupt is restored.

<Roulette reach production>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment provided with the game board 5A, a drum type effect display device 71 is used instead of the liquid crystal display device 70 as the effect display device for displaying decorative patterns and effect images. Further, in addition to the drum type effect display device 71 which is the main decorative symbol display device, the light guide plate 72 can be used as the sub-decorative symbol display device.

The display of decorative symbols and effect images by these decorative pattern display devices (drum type effect display device 71 and light guide plate 72) is controlled by the effect control board 200 (mainly the effect control CPU 201). As for the detailed functions such as determination of the effect content on the effect control board 200, the content described for the pachinko machine 1 provided with the liquid crystal display device 70 with reference to FIG. 26 and the like can be diverted.

Hereinafter, the roulette reach effect, which is one of the effects that can be performed in the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 5A, will be described.

When the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect determination means 225 corresponds to the roulette reach effect (or, the effect control board 200 executes the effect corresponding to the roulette reach effect based on the variation effect pattern). When is determined), the effect is executed according to the change of the special symbol. The roulette reach effect includes not only the variation display of the decorative pattern but also the illumination control of the backlight of the drum type effect display device 71 and the light source of the light guide plate 72 as described later. , It may be regarded as an effect realized by combining the advance notice effect pattern determined by the advance notice effect determination means 226 based on the variable effect pattern. The same applies to other effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 5A, which will be described later (for example, a seven reach effect, a vision chance effect, etc., which will be described later).

63 to 66 are diagrams for explaining a display mode of the effect display device in the roulette reach effect. In FIGS. 63 to 66, the modes of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area 710 in each process of the roulette reach effect are illustrated in chronological order. The flow of the display form in the roulette reach effect will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. In FIGS. 63 to 66, the seven symbols displayed on the reels 711 (711a, 711b, 711c) of the drum-type effect display device 71 are shown in white, whereas the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 are shown in white. Is shown with a diagonal line on the right side.

In the roulette reach effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), during the variable display of the decorative symbol by the reel 711, a stop type that does not mean a hit (for example, "missing eye" in the figure) is temporarily stopped (hereinafter, "missing eye"). , Also called "temporary stop"). In FIG. 63 (A), the symbols other than the main symbols are not shown. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 63 (B) and 64 to 66.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), all the reels 711 rotate in the forward direction (from top to bottom in the figure) at high speed, and then, according to the development pattern of the roulette reach effect, The reel 711 is temporarily stopped (re-stopped) again in various stop forms.

Here, the roulette reach effect of this example includes a plurality of development patterns having different expectations for the final effect result (hits / losses, number of established lines, etc.), and specifically, for example, the lowest expectation. It is assumed that a "standard pattern", a "chance pattern" having a higher expectation than the standard pattern and a lower expectation than the intense heat pattern, and a "extreme heat pattern" having the highest expectation are prepared.

67 (A) to 67 (C) are diagrams for explaining an example of a stop type of reel re-stop for each development pattern. 67 (A) to 67 (C) show an example of a stop type (roll) rule in the middle stage when the reel 711 restarts after the high-speed rotation of FIG. 67 (B) for each development pattern. ing.

Specifically, for example, in the case of FIG. 67 (A) showing the standard pattern, the stop symbols in the left column and the right column may be arbitrary (“any”), and the final stage by the effect is in the middle row of the middle column. It is stipulated that the symbol of SEQ ID NO: 9 (refer to FIG. 21, a blank symbol whose top and bottom are sandwiched between 7 symbols) is stopped regardless of whether the result is a hit or a loss. However, although the left column and the right column are optional, it is possible to avoid confusion due to the same shape as the stop type in other development patterns, or at the time of the restart, 7 symbols are aligned on any of the upper and lower lines. In order to avoid this, it is preferable to set a predetermined limit.

Although specific description of FIGS. 67 (B) and 67 (C) is omitted, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), the re-stop type of the reel 711 after high-speed rotation is performed for each development pattern. By providing a difference in the reels, it is possible to raise the player's interest in what kind of symbol will be restarted, and it can be expected that the interest in the roulette reach production will be enhanced. Further, in FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), the same stop type is defined regardless of the final effect result (hit / loss) of the effect, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. , At least in any of the development patterns, a stop-type law that differs depending on the effect result may be defined. In this case, it is possible to prepare a case in which the hit result can be estimated immediately when the player stops again in a specific stop form, so that the effect of further increasing the interest of the player can be expected.

FIG. 64A shows an example of a stop type when all reels 711 are stopped again after high-speed rotation when the standard pattern roulette reach effect is selected. The re-stop type of FIG. 64 (A) is in accordance with the rule shown in FIG. 67 (A), and specifically, the 9th blank symbol is stopped in the middle middle row (in other words, the middle). The 7th symbol of No. 10 is stopped in the upper row, and the 7th symbol of No. 8 is stopped in the lower middle row), and the middle reel 711b is stopped. Further, the stop symbols in the left and right rows are arbitrary symbols such that the seven symbol alignments are not formed.

After FIG. 64 (A), the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), seven symbols in the light emitting region 721b (FIG. 20) in the middle row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 are lit and displayed for a short time, and then these seven symbols are displayed. However, it moves in order to the middle row middle row and the right row middle row at a constant speed, and after reaching the right row middle row, returns to the left row middle row again and repeats the same operation as described above. The seven symbols in the light emitting region 721d (FIG. 20) and the seven symbols in the light emitting region 721f (FIG. 20) in the middle of the right column are lit and displayed in order for a short time. In addition, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the middle row of the left column, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721d in the middle row of the middle row, and the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right row of the light guide plate 72 are sequentially and cyclically lit for a short time. Will be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the seven symbols in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 move at a higher speed in order and cyclically to the middle row in the left row, the middle row in the middle row, and the middle row in the right row. In addition, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the middle row of the left column, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721d in the middle row of the middle row, and the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right row of the light guide plate 72 are sequentially and cyclically for a short time. It is lit and displayed.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72, which have been moving at high speed until then, stop at the middle stage of the middle row. As a result, in the middle row of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol of the middle reel 711b (FIG. 20) is in the upper row, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 is in the middle row, and the middle reel 711b is in the lower row. A set of 7 symbols in which the 7 symbols of No. 8 are lined up in a row is established, and the player is notified of the hit.

After that, some or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 symbols of a part or all of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. It is also possible to produce a re-lottery that can be expected to be promoted to a win on multiple lines, which is also advantageous. By performing such a re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further increased, and the interest in the standard pattern roulette reach effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 64 (E), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 moving at high speed are other than the middle row and the middle row (for example, the right column). Stop at the middle row or the middle row in the left column). As a result, the 7 symbols are not aligned, and the player is notified of the loss.

In this case, after that, a relief variation such as moving the seven symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 to the right again at high speed may be performed, and then, in the mode of aligning the seven symbols shown in FIG. 64 (D). The final stop may be made. By preparing such a relief variation, it is possible to give the player the expectation that there may be a relief variation even after the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 that was moving at high speed stop at a position other than the middle row and the middle stage. It is possible to enhance the interest in the standard pattern roulette reach production.

On the other hand, FIG. 65 (A) shows an example of a stop type when the roulette reach effect of the chance pattern is selected and all reels 711 rotate at high speed and then stop again as shown in FIG. 63 (B). ing. The re-stop type of FIG. 65 (A) is in accordance with the rule shown in FIG. 67 (B). Specifically, the blank symbol No. 8 is stopped in the middle left (in other words, the upper left). The left reel 711a stops (so that the 7th symbol of No. 9 stops in the lower left row and the 7th symbol of No. 7 stops in the lower left row), and the 9th blank symbol stops in the middle middle row (in other words, 10 in the middle upper row). The middle reel 711b is stopped (so that the 7th symbol of No. 7 and the 7th symbol of No. 8 are stopped in the lower middle row). Further, the stop symbol in the right column is an arbitrary symbol such that the 7 symbol alignment is not formed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), seven symbols in the light emitting region 721b (FIG. 20) in the middle left column of the light guide plate 72 are lit and displayed for a short time, and further, FIGS. 65 (B) and (C) are displayed. As shown in the above, the seven symbols in the light emitting region 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 and the middle row in the right row so that the seven symbols perform the same movements as described above for FIGS. 64 (B) and 64 (C). The 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f and the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the middle of the left column are sequentially and cyclically lit and displayed for a short time.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 that have been moving at high speed stop at the middle stage of the middle row. As a result, in the middle row of the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b No. 10 in the upper row, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 in the middle row, and the 8th symbol of the middle reel 711b in the lower row. A set of 7 symbols in which 7 symbols are lined up is established, and the player is notified of the hit. After that, the re-lottery may be produced, and by doing so, the player's interest can be raised and the interest in the chance pattern roulette reach production can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the final result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 moving at high speed are other than the middle row in the middle row (for example, the middle row in the right row). Or stop at the middle row in the left column). As a result, the 7 symbols are not aligned, and the player is notified of the loss. In this case as well, the relief change may be performed after this, which can give the player the expectation that there may be a relief change, and the interest in the roulette reach production of the chance pattern. Can be enhanced.

On the other hand, FIG. 66A shows an example of a stop type when all reels 711 are restarted after high-speed rotation when the roulette reach effect of the intense heat pattern is selected. The re-stop type of FIG. 66 (A) is in accordance with the rule shown in FIG. 67 (C), and specifically, the 9th blank symbol is stopped in the middle middle row (in other words, the middle). The middle reel 711b stops (so that the 10th 7 symbol stops in the upper row and the 8th 7 symbol stops in the middle lower row), and the 8th blank symbol stops in the right middle row (in other words, 9 in the upper right row). The right reel 711c is stopped (so that the 7th symbol of No. 7 and the 7th symbol of No. 7 are stopped in the lower right row). Further, the stop symbols in the left column are arbitrary symbols such that the seven symbol alignments are not formed.

Then, after FIG. 66 (A), the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), seven symbols in the light emitting region 721b in the middle row of the left column of the light guide plate 72 are lit and displayed for a short time, and further, FIGS. 66 (B) and (C). As shown in the above, the seven symbols in the light emitting region 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 and the middle row in the right row so that the seven symbols perform the same movements as described above for FIGS. 64 (B) and 64 (C). The 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f and the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the middle of the left column are sequentially lit and displayed for a short time.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 moving at high speed stop at the middle stage of the right column. As a result, in the right column of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol of the right reel 711c (FIG. 20) is in the upper row, the 7th symbol of the right row and the middle row of the light guide plate 72 is in the middle row, and the 7th symbol of the right reel 711c is in the lower row. A set of 7 symbols in which 7 symbols are lined up is established, and the player is notified of the hit. After that, the re-lottery may be produced, and by doing so, the player's interest can be raised and the interest in the roulette reach production of the intense heat pattern can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72, which was moving at high speed, stopped on the right side of the middle stage of the right column. As if, the 7 symbols are not displayed in the symbol display area 710. As a result, the 7 symbols are not aligned, and the player is notified of the loss. In this case as well, the relief change may be performed after this, which can give the player the expectation that there may be a relief change, and is an interest in the roulette reach production of the intense heat pattern. Can be enhanced.

<Seven reach production>
Next, a seven reach effect, which is one of the effects that can be performed on the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 5A, will be described.

In FIGS. 68 and 69, when the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect determination means 225 corresponds to the seven reach effect (or, the execution of the effect corresponding to the roulette reach effect based on the variation effect pattern). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode (when is determined).

In FIG. 68, the symbol display area 710 is shown in each process of the Seven Reach production in which the reach line (vertical, horizontal or diagonal line in which two hit symbols of the same type are aligned) develops into one super reach from the normal reach. The modes of the displayed symbols are illustrated in chronological order. Further, FIG. 69 illustrates in chronological order the modes of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area in each process of the seven reach effect when the reach line develops from the normal reach into two super reach. Hereinafter, the flow of the display mode in the Seven Reach effect will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69.

First, the Seven Reach production, in which the reach line develops into one super reach, will be described. In this case, the seven reach effect is, for example, during the variable display of the decorative symbol by the reel 711, for example, the 6th dinosaur C symbol of the left reel 711a (FIG. 20) in the left middle row and the right reel 711c (FIG. 20) in the right middle row. ), The 11th dinosaur C symbol is temporarily stopped and started when the reach of the dinosaur C symbol is reached (see FIG. 68 (A)). After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), the 8th 7 symbol of the middle reel 711b is temporarily stopped in the middle upper stage. In FIG. 68A, symbols other than the main symbols are not shown. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 68 (B) to 68 (L).

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the backlights of the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 are turned off, and the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c are turned off at high speed in the forward direction. The rotation starts, and at the same time, the middle reel 711b rotates in the forward direction by one symbol, so that the 8th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b move from the middle upper stage to the middle middle stage. The left reel 711a and the right reel 711c will be changed to the seven symbols of the middle reel 711b at the timings of FIGS. 68 (D), 68 (G), 68 (K), and 68 (L), which will be described later. The light guide plate 72 is stopped at one of a plurality of prepared symbol patterns so that the seven symbols are not aligned in combination with the displayed 7 symbols.

Then, after FIG. 68 (B), the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the seven symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 move downward in order to the upper left, middle left, and lower left, and are synchronized with this. Then, the 7 symbols in the right row of the light guide plate 72 move downward in order to the upper right row, the middle right row, and the lower right row at a constant speed, and after each of these 7 symbols on the left and right reaches the lower row in the left row and the lower row in the right row. , 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721a (FIG. 20) in the upper left column of the light guide plate 72 and the light emitting area 721e in the upper right column so as to return to the upper left column and the upper right column again and repeat the same operation as described above. The 7 symbols in FIG. 20), the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721b (FIG. 20) in the middle row of the left column, the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721f (FIG. 20) in the middle row in the right column, and the light emitting region 721c (FIG. 20) in the lower row in the left column. The 7 symbols of No. 1 and the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721 g (FIG. 20) in the lower right column are lit and displayed in order and cyclically for a short time.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the first rotation, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the player moves downward at a constant speed in synchronization until then. Each of the seven symbols in the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72 stopped at the middle stage of the left column and the middle stage of the right column, respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the left row middle of the light guide plate 72 in the left middle row, the 8th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b in the middle middle row, and the right row middle row of the light guide plate 72 in the right middle row. A set of 7 symbols in which the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f of the above are arranged in a row is established, and a hit is notified to the player.

After that, some or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 symbols of a part or all of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. It is also possible to produce a re-lottery that can be expected to be promoted to a win on multiple lines, which is also advantageous. By performing such a re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further increased, and the interest in the seven-reach effect with one reach line can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is lost, or when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit is displayed in the second and subsequent rotations, FIG. 68 ( As shown in E), the seven symbols in the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72, which had been moving in synchronization with the downward direction, are temporarily stopped in the lower left column and the lower right column.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the 7 symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 and the 7 symbols in the right column of the same row are synchronized with each other in the upper row, as in FIG. 68 (C). The 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721a in the upper left column of the light guide plate 72, the 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721e in the upper row in the right column, and the light emitting in the middle row in the left column so as to repeat the operation of sequentially moving to the middle and lower stages at a constant speed. The 7 symbols in the region 721b and the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721f in the middle of the right column, and the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721c in the lower left column and the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721g in the lower right column are sequentially and cyclically for a short time. Lights up and displayed one by one. At this time, the middle reel 711b rotates in the forward direction by one symbol, so that the 8th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b move from the middle middle stage to the middle lower stage, and the 10th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b are moved. Is displayed in the upper middle row.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the second rotation, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), the player moves at a constant speed in synchronization with the downward direction until then. Each of the seven symbols in the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72 stopped at the lower left column and the lower right column, respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721c in the lower left row of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row, the 8th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b in the lower middle row, and the lower right row of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row. A set of 7 symbols in which 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721 g of the above are arranged in a row is established, and a hit is notified to the player.

After that, the re-lottery effect may be performed, and by doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the interest in the seven reach effect with one reach line can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is lost, or when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed in the third and subsequent rotations, FIG. 68 (H) shows. As described above, did each of the seven symbols in the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72, which had been moving downward at a constant speed in synchronization with each other, stopped below the lower left column or the lower right column, respectively? As shown above, it is not displayed in the symbol display area 710.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the backlight of one of the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 is turned on, and the back light is turned on. The left reel 711a or the right reel 711c rotates in the forward direction. Then, when the backlight of the left reel 711a of the drum type effect display device 71 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), the 7th symbol is the lower left row and the 7th symbol is the upper left row. When the left reel 711a is stopped so as to be located at, and the backlight of the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 is turned on, the 7th symbol is the lower left and the 7th symbol is the upper left. The right reel 711c stops so that it is located at.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the seven symbols in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 move in order at a constant speed to the middle row in the left row, the middle row in the middle row, and the middle row in the right row, and after reaching the middle row in the right row. The 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the middle row of the left column of the light guide plate 72, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721d in the middle row of the middle row, and the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right row so as to return to the middle row of the left row and repeat the same operation. 7 symbols are lit and displayed in order and cyclically for a short time.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the third rotation, as shown in FIG. 68 (K), the guidance that has been cyclically moved to the right until then. When the backlight of the left reel 711a was lit in FIG. 68 (I), the backlight of the left reel 711a was lit in the middle row of the left row or the middle row, and the backlight of the right reel 711c was lit in FIG. 68 (I). In that case, stop at the middle row of the right column or the middle row of the middle row.

As a result, when the 7 symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 stop in the middle of the left column, in the left column of the symbol display area 710, the 9th 7 symbols of the left reel 711a are in the upper left and the light guide plate 72 is in the middle left. A set of 7 symbols in which the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the middle row of the left column and the 7 symbols of the 7th symbol of the left reel 711a are arranged in the lower left row is established, and the player is notified of the hit. When the 7 symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 stop in the middle row of the middle row, in the middle row of the symbol display area, the 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b in the middle upper row and the middle of the light guide plate 72 in the middle middle row. Seven symbols of the light emitting region 721d in the middle row and seven symbols of No. 8 of the middle reel 711b are arranged in a row in the lower middle row, thereby notifying the player of the hit. Further, when the 7 symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 are stopped in the middle of the right column, in the right column of the symbol display area 710, the 9th 7 symbols of the right reel 711c are in the upper right row, and the light guide plate 72 is in the middle right row. Seven symbols in the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right column and seven symbols of No. 7 in the right reel 711c are arranged in a row in the lower left row, whereby the player is notified of the hit.

After that, the above-mentioned re-lottery effect may be performed, and by doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the interest in the seven-reach effect with one reach line can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is a loss, as shown in FIG. 68 (L), the 7 symbols in the middle of the light guide plate, which had been moving from left to right until then, are aligned. Stop in a manner that does not result in. As a result, the seven symbols are not aligned in the symbol display area 710, and the player is notified of the loss.

In this case, after that, a relief variation in which the seven symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 are moved to the right again at high speed may be performed, and then the final stop of FIG. 68 (K) in the manner of the above-mentioned seven symbols alignment. You may try to do it. By preparing such a relief variation, it is possible to give the player the expectation that there may be a relief variation even after the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 are stopped in the lost stop form, and the reach line can be increased. It is possible to enhance the interest in one Seven Reach production.

Next, the Seven Reach production in which the reach line develops into two super reach will be described. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the seven reach effect is started when each reel 711 is temporarily stopped in the same stop form as in FIG. 68 (A) to reach the reach. Reel. After that, for example, the middle reel 711b starts to rotate at a higher speed than before, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the 8th 7 symbol of the middle reel 711b temporarily stops in the middle upper stage. In FIG. 69A, symbols other than the main symbols are not shown. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 69 (B) to 69 (L).

After that, as shown in FIG. 69B, the backlights of the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c of the drum type effect display device 71 are turned off, and the left reel 711a and the right reel 711c are turned off at high speed in the forward direction. The rotation starts, and at the same time, the middle reel 711b rotates in the forward direction by two symbols, so that the 8th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b move from the middle upper stage to the lower middle stage, and the 10th design of the middle reel 711b. 7 symbols are displayed in the upper middle row. The left reel 711a and the right reel 711c will be changed to the seven symbols of the middle reel 711b at the timings of FIGS. 69 (D), 69 (H), 69 (L), and 69 (M), which will be described later. The light guide plate 72 is stopped at one of a plurality of prepared symbol patterns so that the seven symbols are not aligned in combination with the displayed 7 symbols.

Then, after FIG. 69 (B), the light emitting effect by the light guide plate 72 is started. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the seven symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 move downward in order to the upper left, middle left, and lower left, and are synchronized with this. Then, the 7 symbols in the right row of the light guide plate 72 move downward in order to the upper right row, the middle right row, and the lower right row at a constant speed, and after each of these 7 symbols on the left and right reaches the lower row in the left row and the lower row in the right row. , 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721a (FIG. 20) in the upper left column of the light guide plate 72 and the light emitting area 721e in the upper right column so as to return to the upper left column and the upper right column again and repeat the same operation as described above. The 7 symbols in FIG. 20), the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721b (FIG. 20) in the middle row of the left column, the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721f (FIG. 20) in the middle row in the right column, and the light emitting region 721c (FIG. 20) in the lower row in the left column. The 7 symbols of No. 1 and the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721 g (FIG. 20) in the lower right column are lit and displayed in order and cyclically for a short time.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the first rotation, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the player moves downward at a constant speed in synchronization until then. Each of the seven symbols in the left row and the right column of the light guide plate 72 stopped at the lower row in the left row and the lower row in the right row, respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721c in the lower left row of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row, the 8th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b in the lower middle row, and the lower right row of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row. A set of 7 symbols in which 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721 g of the above are arranged in a row is established, and a hit is notified to the player.

After that, some or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 symbols of a part or all of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. It is also possible to produce a re-lottery that can be expected to be promoted to a win on multiple lines, which is also advantageous. By performing such a re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further increased, and the reach line can enhance the interest in the two seven reach effects.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is lost, or when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed in the second and subsequent rotations, FIG. 69 (E). ), The seven symbols in the left column and the right column of the light guide plate 72, which had been moving in synchronization with the downward direction, are temporarily stopped in the middle stage of the left column and the middle stage of the right column, respectively.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the 7 symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 and the 7 symbols in the right column of the same row are synchronized with each other in the upper row, as in FIG. 69 (C). The 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721a in the upper left column of the light guide plate 72, the 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721e in the upper row in the right column, and the light emitting in the middle row in the left column so as to repeat the operation of sequentially moving to the middle and lower stages at a constant speed. The 7 symbols in the region 721b and the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721f in the middle of the right column, and the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721c in the lower left column and the 7 symbols in the light emitting region 721g in the lower right column are sequentially and cyclically for a short time. Lights up and displayed one by one.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed by the second rotation, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the player moves at a constant speed in synchronization with the downward direction until then. Each of the seven symbols in the left and right columns of the light guide plate 72 stopped at the lower left column and the lower right column, respectively. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 7 symbols of the light emitting area 721c in the lower left row of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row, the 8th 7 symbols of the middle reel 711b in the lower middle row, and the lower right row of the light guide plate 72 in the lower left row. A set of 7 symbols in which 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721 g of the above are arranged in a row is established, and a hit is notified to the player.

After that, the re-lottery effect may be performed, and by doing so, the player's interest can be increased and the reach line can enhance the interest in the two seven reach effects.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is lost, or when the final effect result of the effect is a hit and the hit display is performed in the third and subsequent rotations, FIG. 69 (H) shows. As such, the seven symbols in the left column and the right column of the light guide plate 72, which had been moving downward at a constant speed in synchronization until then, stop at the middle stage of the left column and the middle stage of the right column, respectively. Then, as shown in FIGS. 69 (I) to 68 (L), the same operation as described above is performed for FIGS. 68 (I) to 68 (L).

<Vision chance production>
Next, the vision chance production, which is another production that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 5A, will be described.

FIG. 70 shows when the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect determination means 225 corresponds to an effect called “vision chance” (hereinafter referred to as “vision chance effect”) (or the variation effect pattern). It is a figure for demonstrating the display mode (when the execution of the production corresponding to the vision chance production is decided based on). The "vision chance" is a super reach that develops from the variable display state of the decorative pattern by the reel 711.

Specifically, in the vision chance effect, after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol by the reel 711, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the 4th reel 73 rotates and the above-mentioned symbol number 5 “CHANGE” with respect to FIG. 22 It starts when it stops at the picture. Then, first, as shown in FIG. 70B, all the backlights of the reels 711 (left reel 711a, middle reel 711b, and right reel 711c) of the drum-type effect display device 71 are turned off.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), the seven symbols in the left column of the light guide plate 72 move downward in order to the upper left, middle left, and lower left, and in synchronization with this, the light guide plate. The 7 symbols in the right column of 72 move downward in order to the upper right, middle right, and lower right at a constant speed, and after each of these 7 symbols on the left and right reaches the lower left column and lower right column, the left column again. 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721a (FIG. 20) in the upper left column of the light guide plate 72 and the light emitting area 721e (FIG. 20) in the upper right column so as to return to the upper row and the upper row in the right row and repeat the same operation as described above. 7 symbols, 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721b (FIG. 20) in the middle left column, 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721f (FIG. 20) in the middle right column, 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721c (FIG. 20) in the lower left column, and The seven symbols in the light emitting region 721 g (FIG. 20) in the lower row of the right column are lit and displayed in order and cyclically for a short time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), each of the seven symbols in the left column and the right column of the light guide plate 72 stops in the upper row in the left column and the upper row in the right column, respectively, and after that, in FIG. 70 (E). As shown, the seven symbols in the light emitting region 721c in the lower left column of the light guide plate 72 and the seven symbols in the light emitting region 721g in the lower row in the right column are lit and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), the seven symbols in the light emitting region 721b in the middle row of the left row of the light guide plate 72 are lit for a short time, and then the seven symbols are displayed at a constant speed in the middle row of the middle row. , 7 symbols in the light emitting area 721d in the middle row of the light guide plate 72 so as to move in order to the middle row in the right column, return to the middle row in the left row again after reaching the middle row in the right column, and repeat the same operation as described above. In addition, the seven symbols in the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right column are lit and displayed in order for a short time. In addition, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721b in the middle row of the left column, the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721d in the middle row of the middle row, and the 7 symbols of the light emitting region 721f in the middle row of the right row of the light guide plate 72 are sequentially and cyclically lit for a short time. Will be done.

Then, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit on one line, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the seven symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72, which have repeatedly moved to the right until then, are on the right. Stop in the middle of the line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), the 7th symbol of the left reel 711a is located in the left middle stage, the 8th 7 symbol of the middle reel 711b is located in the middle middle stage, and the right reel 711c Each reel 711 (left reel 711a, middle reel 711b and right reel 711c) is stopped so that the 7th symbol of No. 7 is located in the middle right, and all the backlights of each reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 are turned on. To do. Further, all the seven symbols displayed on the light guide plate 72 are turned off. As a result, in the middle of the symbol display area 710, the 7th symbol of the left reel 711a of the drum type effect display device 71, the 8th 7th symbol of the middle reel 711b, and the 7th 7th symbol of the right reel 711c are arranged in a row. A set of 7 symbols lined up in is established, and the player is notified of the hit.

After that, some or all of the reels 711 are restarted, and 7 symbols of a part or all of the issuing areas 721a to 721g of the light guide plate 72 are blinked. It is also possible to produce a re-lottery that can be expected to be promoted to a win on multiple lines, which is also advantageous. By performing such a re-lottery effect, the player's interest can be further increased, and the interest in the vision chance effect can be enhanced.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is a hit on a plurality of lines (here, two lines), from the state described above for FIG. 70 (F), as shown in FIG. 70 (I), until then, the right. The seven symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72, which have repeatedly moved in the direction, stop at the middle and middle stages.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), the left reel 711a is stopped so that the 7th symbol of No. 7 is located in the lower left row and the 7th symbol of No. 9 is located in the upper left row, and the 7th symbol of No. 8 is in the middle. The middle reel 711b is stopped so that it is located in the middle stage, the right reel 711c is stopped so that the 7th symbol of No. 7 is located in the lower right stage, and the 7th symbol of No. 9 is located in the upper right stage. All the backlights of each reel 711 are turned on. Further, all the seven symbols displayed on the light guide plate 72 are turned off. As a result, in the symbol display area 710, the 9th 7th symbol of the left reel 711a in the upper left, the 8th 7th symbol of the middle reel 711b in the middle middle row, and the 7th 7th symbol of the right reel 711c in the lower right row are on the right. Lined up in a row on the descending line, the 7th symbol of the left reel 711a in the lower left, the 8th 7th symbol of the middle reel 711b in the middle middle row, and the 9th 7th symbol of the right reel 711c in the upper right row. A set of 7 symbols on 2 lines arranged in a row on the upward-sloping line is established, and the player is notified of the hit.

After that, the re-lottery may be produced, and by doing so, the player's interest can be raised and the reach line can enhance the interest in the two vision chance productions.

On the other hand, when the final effect result of the effect is a loss, the object has repeatedly moved to the right at a constant speed from the state described above with respect to FIG. 70 (F) until then, as shown in FIG. 70 (K). The seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 are not displayed in the symbol display area 710 as if they stopped on the 4th reel 73.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (L), the 7th symbol of the left reel 711a is located in the left middle stage, the 8th 7 symbol of the middle reel 711b is located in the middle upper stage, and the right reel 711c. Each reel 711 is stopped so that the 7th symbol of No. 7 is located in the middle right stage, and all the backlights of each reel 711 in the drum type effect display device 71 are turned on, whereby the player is notified of the loss.

In this case, after that, a relief variation such as moving the seven symbols in the middle of the light guide plate 72 to the right again at high speed may be performed, and then, in the manner of aligning the seven symbols shown in FIG. 70 (H). The final stop may be made. By preparing such a relief variation, it is possible to give the player the expectation that there may be a relief variation even after each reel 711 is stopped in the stop form shown in FIG. 70 (L). It is possible to enhance the interest in directing vision opportunities.

According to the vision chance effect as described above, the stop type by the light guide plate 72 described above for FIGS. 70 (G) and 70 (K) and the final type described above for FIGS. 70 (H) and 70 (L). Since it is different from the stop type of the display symbol by the drum type effect display device 71, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the vision chance effect.

<Other effects using the light guide plate>
In the above-mentioned roulette reach effect, seven reach effect, and vision chance effect, the reach line is always visible to the player, but it is displayed until the player presses the effect button 3j (FIG. 1 or the like). It is also possible to produce an effect in which the seven symbols of the light guide plate 72 that have not been displayed are displayed for the first time so that the player can recognize the reach line.

For example, after each reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 is stopped in a stop type (“missing eye”) that does not mean a hit, the light guide plate is triggered by the player pressing the effect button 3j. The seven symbols of each of the light emitting regions 721a to 721g of 72 are lit and displayed for a short time so as to rotate randomly or like a roulette wheel. After that, among the 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72, the 7 symbols are aligned in combination with the 7 symbols of the left reel 711a, the middle reel 711b, and / or the right reel 711c existing in the symbol display area 710. The blinking of each light emitting region 721a to 721g of the light guide plate 72 is stopped so that only one or a plurality of seven symbols are turned on in order.

By providing such an effect, the reach line can be recognized for the first time by pressing the effect button 3j, so that even if each reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 is stopped due to a loss, such an effect can be obtained. It is possible to give the player the expectation that it may be started, and the player's interest in the game can be enhanced accordingly.

As a countermeasure for the player who does not dare to press the effect button 3j, in the case of a hit, a hit line (a line in which the hit symbols are lined up in a row) is set immediately before each reel 711 of the drum type effect display device 71 stops. It may be displayed by 7 symbols of the light guide plate 72.

<Effect of production using light guide plate>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 72 as a sub-decorative symbol display device is provided in addition to the drum type effect display device 71, it can be expressed only by the drum type effect display device 71. It is possible to express a variety of productions. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to perform an unexpected effect, and thus it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game.

<Proposed to suggest the degree of expectation of the fluctuation>
As described above with respect to FIG. 23, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment provided with the game board 5A, the current degree display LED 76, the claw accessory 77, and the small movable accessory 78 (78a, 78b) are used. An effect that suggests the degree of expectation of fluctuation (the fluctuation) (the effect that suggests the degree of expectation of fluctuation) can be executed.

Such a fluctuation expectation suggestion effect is controlled by the effect control board 200 (mainly the effect control CPU 201) of the peripheral control unit 5c. When the effect control board 200 determines the execution of the variation expectation suggestion effect by the variation effect determining means 225, the effect control board 200 executes the effect according to the variation of the special symbol and the decorative symbol.

In the following, a claw rotation step-up notice effect, which is one of the fluctuation expectation suggestion effects that can be executed in the pachinko machine 1 provided with such a game board 5A, will be described.

The claw rotation step-up notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that either the reach effect or the pseudo-continuous effect will be expressed in the fluctuation depending on which of the multiple steps is developed. In the step, the following effects are performed.

First, in the first step, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the entire claw accessory 77 vibrates at the start of the fluctuation. Further, in the second step, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the claw accessory 77 starts rotating around the expectation display LED 76 at high speed, and the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 has a higher expectation. It changes to (for example, blue).

Further, in the third step, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), after the rotation speed of the claw accessory 77 decreases, the small movable accessory 78 (78a, 78b) operates so as to poke the expectation degree display LED 76. If successful, the claw accessory 77 returns to high-speed rotation and continues to rotate. Then, the effect of the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 is repeated several times.

Further, in the third step, each time the small movable accessory 78 successfully pierces the expectation display LED 76, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 is sequentially changed to a higher expectation emission color (for example, yellow, green or red). It changes, and finally, based on the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76, the degree of expectation of the expression of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect in the fluctuation is suggested.

Here, FIG. 72 (A) shows the flow of the display form of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device (here, the drum type effect display device 71), and FIG. 72 (B) shows the claws as described above. In the rotation step-up notice effect, the timing at which the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 operate or the emission color of the expectation degree display LED 76 changes is indicated.

As shown in FIG. 72 (A), first, each reel 711 (left reel 711a, middle reel 711b, right reel 711c) of the drum type effect display device 71 starts rotating in the forward direction, and a predetermined rotation speed ( The rotation speed is accelerated to (high-speed rotation speed) (period T1). After that, these reels 711 that have reached such a rotation speed continue to rotate at high speed for a certain period of time while maintaining the rotation speed (period T2).

Next, the rotation state between the reels 711 is adjusted so as to correct the positional relationship of the symbols displayed on the reels 711 while the reels 711 of the drum-type effect display device 71 rotate at high speed (period T3). ), After that, when the left reel 711a is stopped, the symbol on the left side is stopped and displayed (period T4), and when the right reel 711c is stopped, the symbol on the right side is stopped and displayed (period T5).

If the left and right symbols displayed as stopped are of the same type, the normal reach effect is started after waiting for a certain period (period T6), and then the middle reel 711b is stopped and the central symbol is stopped. It is displayed (period T7).

If the same type of symbols are not aligned on the same line due to normal reach (when the stop shape of the decorative symbol is a loss display mode) and the reach develops into super reach, a drum-type effect is produced. The middle reel 711b of the display device 71 resumes rotation (period T8), and then the effect is displayed according to the final effect result (hit / loss) (period T9).

At this time, if it is decided to execute the claw rotation step-up notice effect as the fluctuation expectation suggestion effect in the fluctuation, the claw is clawed at the timing when the fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 72 (B). When the first step of the rotation step-up notice effect is executed and the entire claw accessory 77 vibrates and develops into the second step in which the claw accessory rotates, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 becomes more expected. Changes to a high emission color (for example, from white to blue) (S1).

After that, in the middle of the period T3, the small movable accessory 78 of the claw rotation step-up notice effect performs a vibrating operation, the third step of executing the thrusting operation is executed, and the claw accessory 77 displays the expectation degree display LED76. As the rotation starts to rotate at high speed, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 changes to a emission color having a higher expectation (for example, changes from blue to yellow) (S2).

Further, in the effect display device, the third step of the claw rotation step-up notice effect is executed at the timing when the normal reach effect is started (the timing of the start of the period T7), and the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 are used. At the same time as the above-mentioned effect is performed, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 changes to a emission color having a higher expectation (for example, changes from yellow to green) (S3A).

After that, at the timing when the reach develops into super reach (the timing of the start of period 8) in the effect display device, the third step of the claw rotation step-up notice effect is executed again, and the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 are executed again. The above-mentioned effect is performed, and the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 is changed to a emission color having a higher expectation (for example, from green to red) (S3B).

The time chart shown in FIG. 72 is an example, and the reels 711 are temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) before the reels are developed into reach (for example, before the period T7, the period T8, and the period T9), and then re-variate. When executing the pseudo-reel (pseudo-variation) effect, the timings of the period T1 to the period T6 are repeated a plurality of times, so that the timings (S1, S2) for changing the color of the expectation display LED 76 should be increased. Can be done.

Further, the timings S1 to S3B for changing the color of the expectation degree display LED 76 may be configured to include a Gase pattern in which the color is not necessarily changed. In that case, the operation of the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 may be included. The pattern is preferably configured to be different from the success pattern (the pattern in which the color changes). In addition, when the number of pseudo fluctuations is 3 or more (an example of a condition in which the development to super reach is deterministic), or when the development to super reach is deterministic in S3B or the like, the expectation level display LED76 When it is time to show the change, the player is paying more attention to the high-expectation reach production that will occur in the future. It is also conceivable to configure it so as not to damage it.

As a notice of changing the color of the expectation degree display LED76, the claw rotation step-up notice effect is illustrated, but it may be performed by other effects, and the expectation degree display LED76 has a different notice effect for each pseudo fluctuation. It may be configured to give the player a sense of anticipation for the change.

<Expectation suggestion production of hold for look-ahead>
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the expectation degree display LED 76, the claw accessory 77, and the small movable accessory 78 are used to suggest the expectation of the pre-reading hold fluctuation (pre-reading target hold expectation suggestion effect). ) Can also be executed.

The look-ahead target hold expectation degree suggestion effect using the expectation degree display LED 76, the claw accessory 77, and the small movable accessory 78 is also controlled by the effect control board 200 (mainly the effect control CPU 201). In practice, when the effect control board 200 is determined to execute the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect for the hold variation (when the look-ahead ID of FIG. 31 determined for the hold variation is other than "0"), The emission color and emission mode of the expectation display LED 76 are changed at a timing before the variation display of the hold fluctuation (pre-reading target hold) is performed, and the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 are linked to this. By making it, the expectation degree of the pending fluctuation (pre-reading target pending) is suggested in advance.

In FIG. 73, among such look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effects, it is determined to execute the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect for the latest hold variation, and the variation effect pattern of each hold variation preceding the hold change is When the condition that all of them are determined to be the variation effect pattern of loss (so-called "dose loss") without reach effect or fanning effect is satisfied (the look-ahead ID of FIG. 31 determined for the hold variation is other than "0". (When the look-ahead ID of each hold change preceding the hold change is determined to be "0"), the flow of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect is shown. In the following, such a condition is referred to as an effect pattern determination condition.

That is, FIG. 73 shows the flow of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect when only the latest hold change is the target of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect. In the following, the hold fluctuation that is the target of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect (the last look-ahead hold change at that stage) in such a situation will be referred to as the effect target hold change.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), first, among the first hold display LEDs 751 of the hold display LED 75, the first hold display LED 751 (for example, FIG. 23 (A)) associated with the effect target hold change In (B), the leftmost first hold display LED751a) starts blinking.

The first hold display LED 751 associated with the effect hold change is subsequently held within the range of the maximum number of holds (4 in this example) of the first special symbol, which is before the effect hold change. Each time a new hold change is held as the effect corresponding to the above is digested, it moves to the first hold display LED 751 on the right side in sequence, which suggests the degree of expectation of the hold change for the effect. The blinking of the first hold display LED 751a is also moved to the right side in sequence.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), each time the variation display of the decorative symbol for each hold variation held before the effect target hold variation is executed, the claw role is used at the start of the variation display. The whole object 77 vibrates for a certain period of time. At this time, when changing the display mode of the expectation display LED 76 as the look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation with respect to the look-ahead target hold, each elapsed time for which the effect content preset for the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect should be changed. Each time (hereinafter referred to as "holding change point") elapses, the left and right small movable accessories 78 pierce the expectation display LED 76, and at the same time, the claw accessory 77 rotates at high speed around the expectation display LED 76. Do the action. At the same time, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 changes to a emission color with a higher expectation. For example, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 is sequentially changed from white to blue, yellow, green, or red each time the variation display of the decorative symbol for each hold variation held before the effect target hold variation is executed. It changes by skipping some colors. On the other hand, at the time of digesting the advance hold before the start of the change with respect to the look-ahead target hold, the change without changing the expectation degree display LED 76 ends only with the vibration of the claw accessory 77 for a certain period of time.

Then, when the order of the effect target hold change is reached, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol for the effect target hold change, the entire claw accessory 77 vibrates for a certain period of time, and at the same time The expectation degree display LED 76 is displayed by taking over the mode that was changed at the time of the previous change. After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), each time the 76 hold change points of the expectation degree display LED based on the notice effect such as the above-mentioned claw rotation step-up notice have passed, the left and right small movable accessories At the same time, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 changes to a emission color having a higher expectation, such as when the 78 pokes the expectation display LED 76.

On the other hand, in FIG. 74, it is determined that the pre-reading target hold expectation degree suggestion effect is executed for the latest hold change, and the change effect pattern of each hold change preceding the hold change does not satisfy the above-mentioned effect pattern determination condition. When the variation effect pattern determined for at least one hold variation of each hold variation preceding the hold variation is a variation effect pattern accompanied by a reach effect or a fan effect (pre-reading of FIG. 31 determined for the hold variation). Pre-reading target hold expectation suggestion effect when the ID is other than "0" and the look-ahead ID of at least one hold change of each hold change preceding the hold change is determined to be other than "0") Shows the flow of.

In this case, the effect pattern of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect (hereinafter, this is referred to as “effect pattern A”) and the effect pattern of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect described above with respect to FIG. 73 (hereinafter, this is referred to as “effect”). The difference from (referred to as "Pattern B") is that while the hold display LED75 is blinking, when the decorative symbol change display for each hold change held before the effect target hold change is executed. Only the vibration operation of the claw accessory 77 is performed, the rotation operation of the claw accessory 77 and the left and right small movable accessories 78 are not operated, and the expectation degree display LED 76 is not changed in advance.

This is to prevent misidentification of the player. That is, when the variation effect pattern determined for at least one of the hold variations held before the effect target hold variation is the variation effect pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the hold variation is the variation. At this stage, there is a possibility that the above-mentioned claw rotation step-up notice effect will be performed for FIG. 71, or the expected degree suggested when the emission color of the expected degree display LED 76 has been changed in advance. This is because there is a risk of being mistaken for a change related to a hold prior to the look-ahead hold.

Further, regarding the operation of the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 in the claw rotation step-up notice effect and FIG. 73 (B) of the look-ahead target hold expectation degree suggestion effect, the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory described above are described. The operation of 78 is similar to the operation of the claw accessory 77 rotating around the expectation display LED 76 at high speed and the small movable accessory 78 piercing the expectation display LED 76 as described above. As in A, when the reach is changed before the hold that is the look-ahead target, the effect that is being performed at that time is either the claw rotation step-up notice effect or the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect. There is a risk that the player will not be able to determine whether or not this is the case.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent such misidentification of the player, the pre-reading hold variation satisfies the above-mentioned predetermined condition, and the hold variation (the effect target hold variation) is used. When the variation effect pattern determined for at least one hold variation of each hold variation previously held is a variation effect pattern accompanied by a reach effect, FIG. 74 of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect. At the stage (B), the claw accessory 77 is rotated at high speed around the expectation display LED 76, or the small movable accessory 78 is made to perform an operation of piercing the expectation display LED 76. In the effect pattern A, which has few similar effect contents, the expectation degree of the pending fluctuation is suggested to the expectation degree display unit including the expectation degree LED76, the claw accessory 77, and the small movable accessory 78.

In fact, in the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect of FIG. 74, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), first, as in FIG. 73 (A), the effect target of the first hold display LED 751 of the hold display LED 75. The first hold display LED 751 associated with the hold change starts blinking.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), each time the variation display of the decorative symbol for each hold variation held before the effect target hold variation is executed, the claw role is used at the start of the variation display. The whole object 77 vibrates for a certain period of time. At this time, for example, in the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect of the effect pattern B described above with respect to FIG. 73 (B), the left and right small movable accessories 78 pierce the expectation display LED 76 at each hold change point, and at the same time, the claws. The accessory 77 was made to rotate at high speed around the expectation display LED 76, but in the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect of the effect pattern A, such an operation of the small movable accessory 78 and the claw accessory 77 is performed. Not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), as in FIG. 73 (C) of the effect pattern B, at the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol with respect to the effect pending variation, the entire claw accessory 77 is displayed for a certain period of time. Since the display mode of the expectation display LED 76 is not changed before the fluctuation to be read ahead is started, the expectation display LED 76 starts blinking in, for example, the color having the lowest expectation. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), as in FIG. 73 (D) of the effect pattern B, the left and right small movable accessories 78 display the expectation degree display LED 76 every time the pending change point elapses. At the same time, the emission color of the expectation display LED 76 changes to a emission color with a higher expectation.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold fluctuation is determined to execute the look-ahead target hold expectation degree suggestion effect and the hold change satisfies the above-mentioned effect pattern determination condition, the change Since the effect pattern B, which has few production contents common to or similar to the expectation suggestion effect, suggests the expectation of the hold fluctuation, the effect being performed at that time is a claw rotation step-up notice effect and a look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot determine which of the effects is produced. As a result, the player's interest in the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect and the fluctuation expectation suggestion effect can be increased, and thus the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

However, even when the look-ahead target hold expectation degree suggestion effect is performed by the effect pattern B, the operation accompanied by the vibration of the claw accessory 77 is executed at the start of the change in the change until the change start of the look-ahead target hold. There is a risk of misidentifying that the claw rotation step-up notice has started. In response to this problem, it is preferable to limit the execution of the claw rotation step-up notice in the fluctuation during the execution of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect of the effect pattern B. As a mode of restriction, a method of not executing at all, a method of not executing in the first pseudo-variation (until the first suspension is performed) that can be recognized as the start of the fluctuation, and the like can be considered.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to make it easier to distinguish between the fluctuation expectation suggestion effect and the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect, the rotation operation of the claw accessory 77 and the claw accessory 77 in the effect pattern A of the look-ahead target hold expectation suggestion effect The case where the effect using the small movable accessory 78 is not performed has been described, but it is made easier to distinguish between the change expectation degree suggestion effect and the look-ahead target hold expectation degree suggestion effect in the other effect contents. It may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to display the expectation degree regarding the look-ahead target hold on the hold display LED 75 of monochromatic light emission in a stepwise and identifiable manner, and the effect is implemented. Since the light emitting unit (such as the LED provided near the movable accessory) that can be recognized by the player is the expectation degree display LED76, the above-mentioned effect is illustrated, but the LED other than the expectation degree display LED76 is illustrated. (For example, when the effect is executed for the lottery of the first special symbol, the color is changed for the LED provided in the first starting port 61), and the expectation degree display LED 76 is for the changing special symbol. It may be possible to display only the degree of expectation. In this case, since the relationship with the effect is weakened with respect to the change in the display mode as the look-ahead effect, the LED that displays the degree of expectation of the look-ahead target hold by making full use of sound effects and the like. It is also possible to show a change effect.

Further, in the above example, in the case of the effect pattern B, the specification is such that the change timing of the display mode of the expectation display LED 76 is provided at the start of the fluctuation every time the fluctuation is started, but the timing is not limited to this timing. , The expectation degree display LED 76 may be changed at the time of hold occurrence (starting opening winning). In addition, since it is possible that the fluctuation time does not remain at the time of the hold occurrence, the operation of the claw accessory 77 and the small movable accessory 78 when the change is performed at the time of the hold occurrence is different from the operation at the start of the fluctuation. (For example, it is executed in a shortened mode in which the claw accessory 77 performs a rotational operation). In this case, depending on the mode of variation implemented at the timing when the hold occurs (for example, the state in which the color change of the expectation display LED 76 has been executed, the state in which the variation that may develop into reach variation is being executed, etc.), the hold is performed. It is conceivable that even if the change at the time of occurrence is won, it will be forcibly canceled.

<Player operation input production>
In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect button 3j and the second effect button 3k (see FIG. 1) are effect input devices that input input information to the effect control board 200 based on an input operation by the player. Yes, they are also collectively called "directing buttons".

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 is based on the fact that an effective input operation for the effect button is performed when the effect linked to the variable display of the decorative symbol or the advance notice effect is executed. , It is possible to execute a "player operation input effect" that can change the effect mode during execution.

Here, the period during which the input operation for the effect button is valid (operation valid period) is determined based on the execution time of the effect being executed, the effect pattern of the player operation input effect, and the like, and prompts the player to operate. Therefore, it is preferable that the operation validity period is notified so that the player can recognize it.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for example, the seg effect display device 74 (see FIG. 19) provided on the game board 5A is used in the player operation input effect controlled by the effect control board 200. Therefore, the notification to the player during the operation valid period is realized. As described above with reference to FIG. 19 and the like, the seg effect display device 74 used in this example is controlled by the effect control board (effect control CPU 201) and is composed of three segment indicators (seg 741a to 741c). ..

In the player operation input effect of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns having different required operation modes (operation types) of the input operation can be provided. Further, the operation effective period can be notified in different production modes according to each effect pattern in which the operation mode of the input operation is different.

Specific operation modes (operation types) of the input operation include, for example, "single press" in which the effect button 3j is required to be pressed once, and "single press" in which the effect button 3j is required to be continuously pressed. "Continuous hit", "long press" that requires the operation of pressing the effect button 3j for a certain period of time or longer, "pull" that requires the pulling operation for the second effect button 3k that has a lever structure, etc. Can be considered.

Further, as another operation mode, when the effect button 3j is continuously pressed by the customize function that can be set by the player, or as a specification of the game machine, when the effect button 3j is continuously pressed (that is, "" When the same input processing as the operation mode of "continuous hitting") is performed, the operation mode in which the effect button 3j is continuously pressed for a certain period of time or longer is referred to as "automatic continuous hitting".

Further, by the customization function that can be set by the player, or as a specification of the game machine, even if the player does not operate the effect button, a suitable operation mode (“single press”, “continuous hit”, “long press”, When the state is in the "deemed operation" state in which the input process is performed assuming that the input operation by "pulling") has been performed, the operation mode is "automatic operation" regardless of whether or not the effect button is operated. It is called.

In addition, the "automatic operation" always executes the required operation (for example, if the success effect is selected in the continuous hitting effect, perform the "deemed operation" to the extent that the success effect is always produced). Alternatively, it may be determined by a production lottery whether or not to perform the "deemed operation", and the production may be executed in a non-operation mode without randomly executing the "deemed operation". In this way, for example, even when the "continuous hit" effect is executed, the reaction based on the "deemed operation" (post-operation effect) is executed several times, while the effect by the "automatic operation" is successful. It is possible to realize an effect mode such that the rate is not set to 100%.

Hereinafter, the player operation input effect including the notification of the operation validity period, which can be executed by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, will be described in detail for each operation mode of the above input operation. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern and the advance notice effect (hereinafter referred to as "main effect" to prevent confusion with the player operation input effect) are being executed. In addition, when the player operation input effect is executed and an effective input operation is performed in the player operation input effect, the effect mode of the main effect can be changed. However, in the case of the automatic operation described later, even if the input operation is not performed during the operation valid period in the player operation input effect, the internal process that considers that the input operation has been performed is performed (deemed operation), so that the main effect is performed. The production mode of the above can be changed. Therefore, it can be expressed that the effect mode of the main effect is changed when a predetermined input condition related to the input operation is satisfied in the player operation input effect. Further, as a specification of a game machine, it is widely known that even if an input operation is not performed during the operation valid period, the effect mode is changed in the same manner as when a predetermined input operation is performed after the operation valid period has elapsed. However, this embodiment does not exclude such specifications.

<Player operation input production (single push)>
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a player operation input effect (normal pattern) of a single push. FIG. 75 is a single shot with a normal pattern, which is executed when the main effect being executed (or the player operation input effect to be executed from now on) is a reach effect or the like (normal pattern effect) with a relatively low degree of expectation. This is an explanation of the push player operation input effect. When the player operation input effect is executed in a normal pattern, the degree of expectation due to the player operation input effect to be executed from now on (the degree of expectation that a successful result can be obtained by the input operation, the fluctuation display will be a big hit. It also includes cases where the degree of expectation) is not higher than the chance pattern described later.

In FIG. 75, a "effect mode" that summarizes the effect contents output to the player side and an "operation reception control" that summarizes the internal control status regarding whether or not the input operation to the effect button can be accepted are shown in chronological order. It is also shown.

Of these, on the "effect mode" side, in addition to the "name" of each effect, as specific effect contents, "seg display" by the seg effect display device 74 and "sound output" by the speaker 11 (speaker 3i). "Is shown. In addition, on the "operation reception control" side, there is an internal "control state" regarding the validity / invalidity of the input operation for the effect buttons (effect button 3j and second effect button 3k) targeted by the player operation input effect. (In other words, whether or not the input information based on the input operation is input to the effect control board 200, or whether or not the effect control board 200 processes the input information as valid) is shown.

Here, the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment is configured by transitioning a plurality of different effect modes, and specifically, an "introduction effect" that prompts an input operation for the effect button and an input to the effect button. Includes "effective time display effect" that notifies that the operation is effectively accepted and prompts the execution of the input operation, and "post-operation effect" that notifies the result of executing the input operation for the effect button. .. Therefore, the effect period of the player operation input effect is the "introduction effect period" from which the "introduction effect" is derived, the "input valid notification period" from which the "effective time display effect" is derived, and the "post-operation effect". ”Is derived from the“ post-operation production period ”.

Of these, in the post-operation effect derived during the post-operation effect period, when the input operation for the effect button in the input valid notification period satisfies a predetermined input condition, the post-operation effect is given to the player in the game targeted by the main effect. It is possible to notify the "profit" or "expectation that the profit will be given". Specifically, the "profit" here corresponds to, for example, a jackpot game, the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot, the type of jackpot (normal / probability variation), and the like. In addition, the "expectation degree to which profit is given" corresponds to the degree of expectation for a big hit, the degree of expectation for the development of high expectation production, and the like.

The above-described contents are common to all the drawings for explaining the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, and the repeated description is omitted in other drawings (for example, FIGS. 78 and 79) described later. To do.

In the following description, it is assumed that the segs 741a to 741c constituting the seg effect display device 74 are segment display devices capable of changing the emission color and the brightness at the time of emission. However, the present embodiment is not limited to the configuration of such a multifunctional segment display, and the seg effect display device 74 appropriately performs seg display within the range of the functions of each segment display. Can be done.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a specific example of the seg display. FIG. 76 (A) shows an example of seg display of numbers (0 to 9) and symbols (upper / middle / lower) by one 7-segment display. Further, FIG. 76B shows an example of seg display of the character string used in the description of the present embodiment. In the case of the seg effect display device 74 of this example, since there are only two 7-segment displays, seg 741b and 741c, it is not possible to display a character string of three or more characters illustrated in FIG. 76 (B) at a time. Can not. The method of displaying such a character string will be described later.

The specific features of FIG. 75 will be described. According to FIG. 75, first, it is suggested and notified that the introduction effect is started during the introduction effect period, and the input operation of a single press is required for the effect button 3j. As a specific effect mode, for example, the seg effect display device 74 uses the seg 741b, 741c to display the character string "PUSH" in white. In this example, the white seg display of the introduction effect suggests that it is a player operation input effect of the "single push" operation.

Here, FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the seg display in the operation input effect. FIG. 77 (A) shows an example of the display transition of the seg display of the character string “PUSH” in the introduction effect of FIG. 75. FIG. 77 (B) and the like will be described later. In addition, in FIG. 77 (A), when displaying the character string "PUSH", it is shown that "-" is displayed before and after "PUSH". This is a delimiter display for improving readability when displaying the display contents (here, PUSH) of three or more characters in two segments 714a and 741b in a stepwise loop display, and another example described later (for example, "good"). , Etc.), the same display may be performed.

The seg display in FIG. 75 is an example. Alternatively, for example, the character string of "Pb" may be displayed by using two segments 714a and 741b as a display meaning "Push Button" (see also FIG. 76 (B)). In this case, since the two-digit segment display represents two characters, "Pb" can be continuously displayed, and there is no need to perform stepwise sequential display as in the case of the character string "PUSH", and the game is played. A person can grasp the instruction contents at a glance.

Further, for example, in the seg display of the introduction effect, the display of the character string such as "PUSH" or "Pb" may be blinked for a predetermined number of times. Further, at this time, it is possible to suggest to the player that the timing of starting the operation is near by increasing the brightness or changing the color as the number of times of lighting increases.

Further, in the introduction effect, the speaker 11 "presses" at a predetermined timing (preferably immediately before the transition) before the transition to the input valid notification period after outputting a predetermined sound effect (jingle) according to the seg display. Is output. With such an introduction effect, the player can more clearly recognize that the effect button 3j is required to be pressed.

Further, in the sound output of the introduction effect, the sound effect may not be output according to the pattern of the main effect being executed or the player operation input effect. Specifically, for example, in the case of a player operation input effect that requires a press operation of the effect button 3j for the look-ahead effect, the effect suddenly occurs by outputting the voice "press" without the sound effect in the first half. It can be expected to make the player feel like this and enhance the interest.

Further, in the sound output of the introduction effect, a sound effect or an instruction sound may be output using a specific dedicated sound source according to the pattern of the main effect being executed or the player operation input effect. Specifically, for example, when a high-expectation effect is executed, the "press" voice is output in an emphasized mode in which the volume, length, voice color, etc. are different from the normal "press" voice. Good. Further, the voice of the emphasized mode may be played so as to continue until the input valid notification period. By giving the voice instruction in such an emphasized mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the production has a higher degree of expectation than usual, and it is possible to raise the interest of the player.

Regarding the operation reception control, the control state of the operation reception control is the "invalid period" for most of the introduction effect period in which the introduction effect is executed, and the input operation of the effect button 3j is invalid. However, at least, by the time the input valid notification period is entered and the valid time display effect is started, the input operation of the effect button 3j is switched to the "valid period" in which the input operation is valid.

However, how long before the input valid notification period is switched to the valid period can be appropriately changed in consideration of the appearance of the effect and the like. For example, in the case of FIG. 75, since a seg display of "PUSH" and a sound output of "press" are performed in the introduction effect, there is a possibility that the player immediately performs an input operation in response to these outputs. Therefore, in such a case, the control state may be switched to the valid period while the voice is output as "press" during the introduction effect period, and as a result, the input operation performed immediately can be accepted. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the effect of preventing the player's interest from being lowered when the input operation is ignored.

Next, when the input valid notification period is entered, the valid time display effect is started. In the effective time display effect, the seg effect display device 74 performs the seg display in a mode different from that at the time of the introduction effect. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (B) and 75, after displaying the character string "Pb" meaning that the effect button 3j is pressed, the remaining time value (for example, the number of seconds) of the operation valid period is displayed. The countdown is displayed from the middle according to. Further, as shown in FIG. 75, as an example, "Pb" is displayed in blue, which suggests a low expectation (or a normal expectation), and the countdown display suggests that it is a countdown. Display in yellow. By performing such an effective time display effect, it is possible to notify the player that the operation valid period for performing the input operation for the effect button 3j and the remaining time thereof. Here, the "Pb" display and the countdown display are displayed in different colors so that the passage of time can be easily understood, but if it is judged that there is distinctiveness because the display mode itself changes, the light is emitted in the same color. Alternatively, when the countdown progresses during the countdown display period and the remaining amount is low (for example, after the count "3"), the emission color may be changed, and such emission control may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to more visually indicate to the player that the remaining operation validity period is short.

Further, in the effective time display effect, the speaker 11 may output a countdown by voice in conjunction with the seg display (see FIG. 75). However, as will be described later, in the single-shot effective time display effect, when the input operation for the effect button 3j is executed once during the operation valid period, the control is changed during the operation invalid period and the post-operation effect starts. Therefore, the audio output of the countdown by the speaker 11 is interrupted when the input operation is executed.

The display mode of the seg display in the effective time display effect is not limited to the above example, and various display modes can be adopted. For example, as another example of the countdown display, FIG. 77 (C) shows an example of a seg display showing the progress of the countdown by gradually turning off the lighting LEDs on the outer circumference using the three segs 714a to 714c. Has been done. In this case, it means that the operation valid period ends when all the LEDs are finally turned off. It should be noted that the color may be changed instead of being turned off.

Further, as another example of the display mode of the seg display in the effective time display effect, the character strings of "PU" and "SH" may be turned on alternately, or the character string of "Pb" may be continuously displayed. In this case, as in the present embodiment shown in FIG. 75, by lighting the LED of the seg display with a color different from the color in the introduction effect, the period of the “introduction effect” and the “effective time display effect”, that is, the invalid period. It is preferable that the validity period can be easily identified by the player.

Furthermore, in the seg display in the effective time display effect, if only the character string is displayed and the countdown display by numbers or symbolic expressions (for example, corresponding to the sequential extinguishing of the outer circumference described above) is not performed separately, the time elapses. By changing the display mode of the character string, the remaining operation validity period may be reduced.

Specifically, for example, the end of the operation valid period can be indicated by gradually reducing the brightness of a character string such as "Pb" and reaching a predetermined dark brightness or completely turning off the light. Further, for example, regardless of the display content of the seg display, the blinking speed (blinking cycle) and the lighting time of the LED of the seg display are gradually changed to indicate the end of the operation valid period by the end of blinking (for example, all lights are turned off). be able to. Further, when the LED is blinked as described above, if a character string having a specific meaning such as "Pb" or "PUSH" is displayed in a segment, the operation type can be notified to the player more clearly. In addition to this, the display content of the seg display and the light emission timing may be combined in another manner. Specifically, for example, a character string such as "Pb" is blinked and displayed at the same brightness and the same cycle until a predetermined timing, and after another predetermined timing near the end of the operation valid period is exceeded, "Pb" is displayed. It is also possible to indicate the end of the operation valid period by displaying a character string such as "" while gradually reducing the brightness, and finally turning off the LED.

In addition, in the seg display in the effective time display effect, the display color (emission color) of the seg display is gradually changed with the passage of time regardless of the type of display content (character string, number, symbolic expression). Depending on the situation, a countdown display may be performed (the color may be changed in combination with the countdown display indicating a numerical value). As a specific color change, for example, a color change in which a general player imagines a decrease in expectation can be adopted, such as in the order of red, green, yellow, blue, white, and extinguishing. Alternatively, the segment indicators (Segs 741a to 741c) displaying the Segs are changed one by one to a specific color (for example, red that makes us feel a sense of crisis), and all the Segs are changed. It may be a method indicating the end of the operation validity period.

Although various display modes of the seg display in the effective time display effect have been shown, the effect control board 200 has a game state (probability change / normal / time reduction, etc.), an effect type (look-ahead effect, special setting by the back button, etc.), etc. In a specific situation based on, the seg display itself in the input valid notification period may not be derived.

Further, in the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, the content suggested in the introduction effect (that is, the input operation request to the effect button) may be redisplayed in the effective time display effect. Specifically, for example, the display of the character string "PUSH" is inserted in the middle of performing the countdown display in the seg display. In this way, by notifying the input operation required even during the input valid notification period, it is possible to recognize that the countdown display is related to the button effect, and it is possible to take measures against the oversight / oversight of the introduction effect. , It is possible to provide a game machine that is kind to the player. In addition, when the input operation request is inserted and displayed in the effective time display effect as described above, during the inserted display, the effect progress in the effective time display effect as the effect display while continuing the valid period of the reception of the effect button. (For example, the color change of the seg display, the progress of the countdown, etc.) may be stopped, or may be progressed in the background. These are not limited to the single-shot player operation input effect, and can be applied to all player operation input effects except for automatic operations such as repeated hits and long presses, which will be described later.

Next, the effect transition after the input operation for the effect button 3j is performed during the input valid notification period (during the execution of the effective time display effect) will be described. Since this example is a single-shot player operation input effect, if one input operation is performed during the operation valid period, the input conditions related to the input operation are satisfied, the operation shifts to the post-operation effect period, and the post-operation effect is performed. It will be started. That is, the effect of the seg display and the sound output in the effective time display effect (specifically, the display of the operation effective time and the notification of the countdown) is stopped when one input operation is executed. At this time, the control state of the operation reception control is switched from the "valid period" to the "invalid period", and thereafter, the input operation of the effect button 3j is invalidated at least until the player operation input effect is completed.

In the post-operation effect, the effect control board 200 displays the result based on the input operation in a mode different from that at the time of the introduction effect and the effective time display effect by using the seg effect display device 74 and the speaker 11. Specifically, for example, in the case of a success effect showing a success result advantageous to the player, as shown in FIG. 75, “good” is displayed in the seg display by the seg effect display device 74 (FIG. 77 (D)). (See), and a predetermined sound effect (SE) is output by the sound output from the speaker 11. On the other hand, for example, in the case of a failure effect showing a failure result that is not favorable to the player, the seg display is set to "---" (the "middle" display of FIG. 76 (A) is displayed side by side on the seg 714b and 714c. To do). The result displayed in the post-operation effect may be determined in advance at the start of the player operation input effect, or when a success or failure is drawn at the time of execution of the input operation, the lottery result is used. May be good.

The display mode in the post-operation effect is not limited to the above example, and other character strings may be seg-displayed or sound output depending on the success effect or the failure effect. Further, for example, the seg 714a to 714c may be fully lit to produce a successful effect. However, for the purpose of clarifying that the result of accepting the input operation is displayed in either the success effect or the failure effect, the effect mode in which the seg display is completely turned off immediately after the start of the effect after the operation should be avoided. Is preferable. Further, the post-operation effect may be replaced with an effect corresponding to a success effect or a failure effect in the main effect.

If the input operation is not performed during the input valid notification period (during the effective time display effect), the operation shifts to the post-operation effect period (post-operation effect) after the input valid notification period elapses, and at the same time, the operation is performed. Reception control can also be switched from the valid period to the invalid period. In the present embodiment, regarding the switching timing when the operation reception control is switched to the invalid period without performing the input operation, a predetermined delay time is secured after all the effects for the effective time display effect have been derived. You may try to do it. In this case, since the input operation by the player can be effectively accepted immediately after the effective time display effect for notifying that the operation acceptance period has been completed, it is possible to relieve the input operation by the player if the input operation is delayed. The possibility is increased, and the effect of giving the player a sense of security can be expected.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it has been described that most of the period of the "introduction effect period" is treated as the "invalid period" of the input operation of the effect button 3j, but the "input operation itself of the effect button 3j" is described. Instead of targeting "invalidity", "switching effect" performed based on the input operation for the effect determined and executed by the effect lottery as a button effect is set as the target of "invalidity". May be good. Further, as a modification, the input operation for "the effect other than the button effect executed during the change as the advance notice effect" may be treated as "effective".

For example, if the introduction effect is executed at the timing when the button effect is executed as the advance notice effect, the character string of "PUSH", which is the introduction effect as the seg display, is displayed, so that the button input operation is performed first. In some cases. Therefore, when the button effect as the advance notice effect is executed, if the button input operation is performed during the introduction effect period, a new mode in which a special effect execution lottery is performed may be adopted. As an example, when the effect button 3j is pressed during the period when the character string "PUSH" of the introduction effect period is displayed on the seg effect display device 74, the variation being executed is a highly expected variation that develops into SP reach. Only in certain cases or when the fluctuation being executed is a big hit, the character string of "PUSH" of the seg effect display device 74 is displayed in yellow or rainbow color for a moment with a predetermined probability, or a character suggesting a chance. It is conceivable to perform an effect such as temporarily replacing the line.

However, if the special effect performed during the introduction period of such a button effect is to be executed at the timing immediately before switching to the "input valid notification period", it is input as the button effect determined in the effect lottery. As a result of the operation, there is a risk of misunderstanding that a display with a high degree of expectation has been executed. Therefore, for example, a special effect is not executed at the timing when the sound effect SE "press" is emitted from the speaker 11. It is preferable to be able to switch and control the period (timing) at which various effects can be performed.

The above is a detailed explanation of the player operation input effect (normal pattern) of a single push. Here, in the present embodiment, the effect control board 200 may be able to execute the player operation input effect of the chance pattern, which has a higher expectation than the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. As a specific case where the player operation input effect of the chance pattern is executed, the player operation input effect is executed in the main effect with high expectation, or the game is played regardless of the expectation of the main effect. It is conceivable that there is a high degree of expectation that the input operation in the human operation input effect will be a successful result.

FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a player operation input effect (chance pattern) of a single push. FIG. 78 shows an example of the effect transition in a form comparable to the example shown in FIG. 75 for the single-shot player operation input effect by the chance pattern, which has a higher expectation than the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. It is shown.

As illustrated in FIG. 78, the player operation input effect of the chance pattern can be realized in an effect mode different from the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. For example, regarding the emission color of the seg display, the part that was white or blue in the normal pattern of FIG. 75, the red color that generally suggests a high degree of expectation in the chance pattern, and the extremely high degree of expectation (successful) of the production success. It may be changed to a rainbow color or the like suggesting (confirmation) and displayed. Further, for example, regarding the sound output, when a masculine voice is used in the normal pattern, a feminine voice or a mechanical voice may be used in the chance pattern. In addition, the dialogue of the voice may be changed.

In addition, the player operation input effect of the chance pattern is set to have a longer composition period (introduction effect period, effective time display effect period, post-operation effect period) than the player operation input effect of the normal pattern. You may do it. By setting the introduction effect period longer, it is possible to execute the fanning effect more strongly than the normal pattern, so that the player's interest in the input operation can be further enhanced. In addition, by setting a longer post-operation effect period, the result can be displayed longer than the normal pattern, so that the player is satisfied by continuing to play a flashy SE especially when notifying the success result. You can expect the effect of enhancing the feeling.

Let's take a concrete look at the example of FIG. 78. First, the introduction effect of FIG. 78 is set to have a longer implementation period (introduction effect period) than the introduction effect of FIG. It changes in multiple stages in the order of "press". Then, in accordance with this change in the output voice, the emission color of "PUSH" may be upgraded from white to red (suggesting a high degree of expectation) in the seg display. If the emission color of the seg display is red from the start of the introduction effect, the downgrade change to white may not be performed in the middle. Further, the timing of the change in the emission color in the seg display and the change in the output sound in the sound output do not have to match. Further, the emission color may be changed in the same type of seg display, for example, the emission color can be upgraded from white to red when "-PUSH-" is repeatedly displayed twice.

Next, in the effective time display effect of FIG. 78, a character string similar to the normal pattern of FIG. 75 is displayed in the seg display (for example, a countdown display from the “Pb” display), but at least a part of the emission colors are displayed. It can be different from the normal pattern. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 75, the character string "Pb" was emitted in blue, but in the case of FIG. 78, the character string "Pb" was replaced with blue suggesting a low expectation (or a normal expectation). Therefore, a pattern that emits red light suggesting a high degree of expectation is prepared.

When the seg display of "PUSH" is red at the end of the introduction effect, it is preferable that the "Pb" of the effective time display effect is also displayed in red from the beginning. By doing so, it is possible to proceed with a series of player operation input effects without lowering the expected degree (reliability) once raised, so that the effect of maintaining the game interest can be expected. However, if the emission color of the seg display is maintained from the introduction effect to the effective time display effect, the brightness may be different even if the same red display is used in order to make the effect mode different between the two effects. Or, it is preferable to display a blinking display.

Next, in the post-operation effect of FIG. 78, the implementation period (post-operation effect period) is set longer than that of the post-operation effect of FIG. 75, which is a normal pattern. The seg display is different from the normal pattern of the blue display in that the character string of "good" is displayed in red or rainbow colors. In general, red is a color that gives an image of high expectations, and rainbow color is a color that gives an image of even higher expectations. The rainbow-colored light emission by the seg effect display device 74 is realized, for example, by emitting light in seven different colors of the individual segs constituting the seg 741a to 741c. Further, in the post-operation effect of FIG. 78, the sound effect (SE) is also output in a mode (volume, length, dialogue, etc.) different from that of the post-operation effect sound effect in the normal pattern.

The above is a detailed explanation of the player operation input effect (chance pattern) of a single push. In the present embodiment, just as it has been explained that various variations can be adopted for the player operation input effect of the normal pattern, various variations are similarly adopted for the player operation input effect of the chance pattern. can do. Further, in the player operation input effect of repeated hits and the player operation input effect of long press, which will be described in detail below, the effect pattern of the chance pattern is provided in addition to the normal pattern, as in the player operation input effect of single press. However, various variations can be adopted for each production mode, but these explanations may be omitted because there are many parts that are repeated explanations.

However, the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment enables various effect modes to be executed as described above, while allowing the operation type of the input operation (single-shot press, repeated hit, long press, etc.) to be distinguished. , It is preferable that the seg display or the output content of the sound output is executed in a different production mode depending on the operation type. In addition, the effect (period) can be distinguished from the introduction effect (introduction effect period), the effective time display effect (input valid notification period), and the post-operation effect (post-operation effect period) that constitute a series of player operation input effects. ), It is preferable that the seg display or the output content of the sound output is executed in a different production mode.

<Player operation input production (continuous hitting)>
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a player operation input effect of repeated hits. With reference to FIG. 79, the player operation input effect of repeated hits will be described in detail.

In the example of FIG. 79, it is suggested and notified that the effect button 3j is required to perform a continuous input operation (intermittently a plurality of input operations) in the introduction effect (introduction effect period). As a specific effect mode, for example, the seg effect display device 74 uses the seg 741b, 741c to display the character string "PUSH" in green or red (see also FIG. 77 (A)). In this example, the green seg display suggests that it is a player operation input effect of the "continuous hit" operation, and the red seg display suggests a high degree of expectation. In the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, the emission color of the seg display is changed to a specific color (for example, red) in order to suggest that the effect is a high expectation effect at each stage as the effect progresses. Can be done. However, in the initial stage of the introduction effect, in order to clarify that the type of input operation required for the player operation input effect is "continuous hit", be sure to display it in green corresponding to the "continuous hit" operation. May be good. The effect control board 200 appropriately indicates the emission color based on the degree of expectation of the player operation input effect. At this time, the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (jingle) according to the seg display, and also outputs a voice "continuous hit!", So that the type of input operation to be obtained is the continuous hit operation of the effect button 3j. Notify that there is.

After that, as the introduction effect progresses, the seg effect display device 74 uses the seg 741c (may be the seg 741b) to display the countdown seg (“3”, “2”, “2”, in order to notify the start of acceptance of the input operation. Perform "1"). This countdown display is emitted in the same color (green or red) as the emission color of the previous "PUSH" seg display, or in red which is upgraded from green. In the introduction effect of FIG. 78 described above, it was explained that the downgrade change from red to white is not performed, but for the same reason, the downgrade change from red to green is not performed in the introduction effect of FIG. 79. Is preferable. The effect control board 200 determines whether or not the upgrade is possible. At this time, the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (jingle) according to the seg display, and also outputs a voice "I'm going!" To start accepting input operations (start of operation valid period). Notifies that is approaching.

As the introduction effect further progresses, the seg effect display device 74 uses the seg 741c (may be the seg 741b) to display the countdown “0” in the seg, and notifies that the reception of the input operation is started. It is assumed that the emission color of "0" is the same color as the emission color of the previous countdown "1". The seg display of the countdown "0" may not be performed. At this time, the speaker 11 notifies the start of acceptance of the input operation by outputting the voice "start" in accordance with the seg display (or at a predetermined timing when the seg display is not performed).

Note that FIG. 79 is only an example of the player operation input effect of the repeated hits according to the present embodiment. As another effect mode, for example, in the introduction effect, the character string of "Pb" may be displayed instead of the seg display for displaying the character string of "PUSH". However, also in this case, it is preferable to start the emission color of the seg display from a specific color (green in this example) so that it can be distinguished from the operation type of other input operations.

Next, the input time display effect shown in FIG. 79 will be described. When the introduction effect period in which the introduction effect is executed ends, the period shifts to the input valid notification period and the effective time display effect is started. As shown in FIG. 79, the control state of the operation reception control is switched from the "invalid period" to the "valid period" at the timing of shifting from the introduction effect period to the input valid notification period. .. By synchronizing the transition timing of the operation reception control with the transition timing of the effect mode in this way, it is possible to accurately invalidate the continuous striking operation performed earlier than the limited operation valid period, and to signal the start of the continuous striking (introduction). It is possible to effectively accept the player's repeated hitting operation that is started according to the production "Start!").

In the effective time display effect, the seg effect display device 74 performs an effect of notifying that the operation effective time decreases with the passage of time. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the outer peripheral countdown gradually turns off (or dims) the outer peripheral seg from the state where the outer peripheral seg is fully lit using the seg 741a to 741c. Seg display by.

The outer peripheral countdown is executed using, for example, the entire operation valid period, and when all the outer peripheral segments are turned off, it is suggested that the operation valid period ends (or the operation valid period ends soon). Further, after displaying the character string of "Pb" or the like in a segment for a certain period of time, the outer circumference countdown may be displayed in consideration of the end timing of the operation valid period.

Here, in the player operation input effect of repeated hits, while the display effect indicating the passage or end of the operation valid period is performed as in the above-mentioned outer circumference countdown display, during the input valid notification period (operation valid period). In addition, it is required that the player repeatedly presses the effect button 3j. Therefore, an effect mode when this pressing operation is repeatedly performed will be described. Although it is common to the player operation input effect by other operation types, in the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, in the effective time display effect, a display effect indicating the passage or end of the operation valid period is shown. It is preferable that the display effect generated in response to the input operation is displayed with a higher priority than the display effect. By doing so, the reaction of the input operation is clearly displayed, and it can be expected to have the effect of making the player feel as if he / she is participating in the production and enhancing the interest. However, the present embodiment is not limited to displaying both of the above-mentioned display effects separately, and may partially display them in a mixed manner.

Referring to FIG. 79, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 3j during the operation valid period, the seg display of the outer circumference countdown is temporarily turned off each time the effect button 3j is pressed, and at the same time, the speaker is turned off. 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (SE) corresponding to the pressing operation. These controls are performed by the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200 may reduce the brightness of the LED (dimming) or change the emission color (for example, blue emission) instead of temporarily turning off the light. As the internal processing related to the temporary extinguishing of the seg display by the effect control board 200, for example, the process of generating the basic data for the effective time display effect is forcibly covered with a predetermined off data for turning off the seg display. The seg display (outer circumference countdown display) based on the basic data can be temporarily turned off. Then, the seg display returns to the outer circumference countdown again after the temporary extinguishing is executed for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the countdown may be advanced in the background even while the light is temporarily turned off, and the remaining count at the present time may be displayed as a segment when the outer circumference countdown is restored.

In this example, the above-mentioned effective time display effect has a predetermined operation valid period (input valid notification period) without being stopped in the middle unlike the effective time display effect in the single-shot player operation input effect. It is assumed that it will continue until it is finished. For example, in the case of FIG. 79, it is shown that the pressing operation of the effect button 3j is executed 6 times during the operation valid period, and in the operation reception control, each operation is effectively received and the input information corresponding to each operation is received. Is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

As another aspect of the effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of repeated hits, for example, the character strings of "PUSH" and "Pb" may be blinked to be displayed in a segment. In this case, it is possible to notify that the operation effective time is decreasing by increasing the blinking speed (blinking cycle) or shortening the lighting time with the passage of time.

Further, as another aspect of the effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of the continuous hitting, the countdown display and the result display by the continuous hitting operation may be combined and displayed as a segment. Such a seg display method is referred to as a "continuous hit challenge", and a specific example will be described below.

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the seg display in the continuous hitting challenge. FIG. 80 shows a transition example of the seg display in the continuous hit challenge in chronological order. In the continuous striking challenge of FIG. 80, among the seg effect display devices 74, the seg 741a and 741b display the countdown of the operation valid period (valid period), and the seg 741c displays the result based on the input operation (press) of the effect button 3j. Is done.

FIG. 80A is an example of the seg display immediately after the continuous hit challenge is started, the countdown display by the seg 741a and 741b is green “18”, and the seg 741c of the result display is fully lit in yellow.

After FIG. 80 (A), the repeated hit challenge continues until the countdown display becomes "0", and the seg lighting pattern of the result display may change each time the effect button 3j is pressed during that time. .. For example, in FIG. 80B, the result display by the segment 741c is changed to a state in which one LED on the outer circumference is turned off in response to the pressing of the effect button 3j. Even if the effect button 3j is pressed, the result display LED may not turn off and change. When the effect button 3j is pressed, the speaker 11 may output a predetermined sound effect (SE) corresponding to the pressing operation, and the result display LED may or may not turn off. You may output different SEs.

Then, similarly, the countdown display and the result display change from FIG. 80 (D) to FIG. 80 (E). In this example, when the remaining time of the countdown is short (for example, FIG. 80 (E)), the emission color of the countdown display changes to red. Further, when the result display is in the final stage (for example, when the remaining lighting LEDs are one as shown in FIG. 80 (E)), the emission color of the result display changes to red.

FIGS. 80 (F) and 80 (G) are transition examples when the repeated hit challenge results in a successful result. When the result display by the seg 741c is completely turned off in response to the pressing of the effect button 3j (FIG. 80 (F)), after the countdown ends (FIG. 80 (G)), the seg effect is displayed in the post-operation effect. The success result is notified by the device 74 displaying the character string "good" or the like. In addition, in FIG. 80 (G), the emission color of the countdown display “0” (or from the display before “0”) is set to a rainbow color that makes the confirmation of success felt, so that the post-operation effect (operation) is produced. It is possible to suggest the success result of the production earlier than the start of the post-production period).

On the other hand, FIGS. 80 (H) and 80 (I) are transition examples when the repeated hit challenge results in a failure. In the case of FIG. 80 (H), even if the effect button 3j is pressed, the result display by the segment 741c is not completely turned off, and some LEDs are still lit. When the countdown ends in this state (FIG. 80 (I)), the failure result is notified by displaying "---" by the seg effect display device 74 in the subsequent post-operation effect. In FIG. 80 (I), the emission color of the countdown display "0" is changed to white, which is different from the previous one, to suggest the failure result of this effect in advance.

By using such a continuous striking challenge display method, it is possible to realize an effective time display effect in an effect mode suitable for the operation mode of continuous striking. In the continuous hit challenge, the transition of the result display by the segment 741c is not limited to the example of FIG. 80. For example, depending on the number of times the effect button 3j is pressed, not only the result display LEDs can be turned off one by one, but also a pattern in which a plurality of LEDs are turned off may be included. Further, as an effect mode in which the appearance rate is low, there may be a pattern in which all the LEDs are suddenly turned off to suggest the confirmation of success.

Further, in the example of FIG. 80, the countdown value of a maximum of 2 digits (however, the upper digit is "1" or "not displayed") is displayed in the countdown display using the segments 741a and 741b, but the countdown display of the repeated hit challenge is displayed. Not limited to this, the countdown display can be performed by giving different meanings to the seg 741a and the seg 741b. Specifically, for example, the continuous striking challenge is started from the same display as in FIG. 80 (A), and the LEDs on the outer circumference of the segment 741b are turned off one by one with the passage of time. Then, every time all the LEDs (six LEDs) on the outer circumference of the seg 741b are turned off (every time the lights are turned off once), one LED of the seg 741a is turned off. After that, all the LEDs on the outer circumference of the segment 741b are turned on again, and then turned off again. When this is repeated, when the LEDs on the outer circumference of the seg 741b are turned off three times, that is, when the LEDs on the outer circumference of the seg 741b are turned off a total of 18 times, all the LEDs on the seg 741a are turned off. The end of the countdown (the end of the operation valid period) can be notified when the Seg 741a is completely turned off.

When the continuous striking challenge includes a plurality of patterns of the effect as described above, the pattern of the continuous striking challenge may be identified by making the emission color and the emission brightness of the seg display different for each pattern. Further, based on the degree of expectation that a successful result can be obtained, which pattern may be derived in the continuous hitting challenge may be selected.

Further, in FIG. 79, there is a portion marked with “*” in the effective time display effect. This means that it is possible to execute a "prompting effect" that urges an input operation when a predetermined input operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the effect button 3j) is not performed during the input valid notification period. Means. In the reminder effect, for example, character strings such as "PUSH" and "Pb" are displayed in a segment, and the sound of "continuous hitting" is output from the speaker 11.

The "non-operation" determination that triggers the execution of the reminder effect may be determined by the effect control board 200 based on a predetermined determination criterion. Specifically, for example, it may be the case that the input operation is not performed even once in the input valid notification period (operation valid period), or a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) in the input valid notification period (operation valid period). If only the following input operations are performed, it may be performed. Further, a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the latest input operation in the input valid notification period (operation valid period) is provided, and when the value of the counter reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds), that is, in the operation valid period. When the non-operation period of the input operation reaches a predetermined time, it may be set. In this case, if the counter is reset each time an input operation is performed, the reminder effect can be executed again after that, and if the counter is not reset, the non-operation is performed by the player after the reminder effect is executed once. It is possible to judge that it is due to the intention of the user and not to execute the reminder effect again.

By executing the reminder effect during non-operation in this way, it is possible to urge the player to repeatedly hit the effect button 3j, so that the input operation required by the player is referred to as "single press" or "long press". If you make a mistake, you can assist in executing the appropriate input operation. In addition, it can also play an auxiliary role for the player who missed or missed the introduction effect.

Next, the post-operation effect shown in FIG. 79 will be described. When the effective time display effect (input valid notification period) ends, the operation shifts to the post-operation effect period and the post-operation effect is executed. At this time, the control state of the operation reception control is also switched from the "valid period" to the "invalid period" at the timing of shifting from the input valid notification period to the post-operation effect period. By synchronizing the transition timing of the operation reception control with the transition timing of the effect mode in this way, it is possible to accurately invalidate the repeated hitting operation performed beyond the limited operation valid period.

In the post-operation effect, the result based on the input operation of repeated hits executed during the effective time display effect (input valid notification period) is obtained during the introduction effect or the effective time display effect using the seg effect display device 74 or the speaker 11. Is displayed in a different manner from. The result displayed in the post-operation effect may be determined in advance at the start of the player operation input effect, or when a success or failure is drawn at the time of execution of the input operation, the lottery result is used. May be good. Further, as a method of determining the result specialized for the input operation of repeated hits, for example, the success result may be displayed on the condition that the input operation is performed a predetermined number of times.

In FIG. 79, as an example of a specific effect mode of the post-operation effect, "good" is displayed in a blue or red seg display, and a predetermined sound effect (SE) is output by the sound output by the speaker 11. It is shown. However, the effect mode of the post-operation effect is not limited to the above example, and various other effect modes may be adopted as described in the post-operation effect of the single-shot player operation input effect. it can.

The player operation input effect of repeated hits has been described in detail above, but the change in the emission color of the seg display will be supplemented below. In the player operation input effect of the repeated hits described above with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, it is possible to change the emission color of the seg display according to the continuous hit situation of the effect button 3j during the effective time display effect. explained. Specifically, it was illustrated that the emission color of the seg display of the outer circumference countdown is changed from blue to red, and the emission color of the result display in the repeated hit challenge is changed from yellow to red. In the present embodiment, whether or not such a change in emission color can be executed is determined according to the degree of expectation of the main effect being executed by the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201), and is based on the number of operations of the effect button 3j and the like. It is possible to control the change in emission color.

As a specific control method, for example, the effect control board 200 (effect control CPU 201) determines a variation pattern of a decorative symbol determined based on a variation pattern of a special symbol (see FIGS. 29 and 30) as input information. The notice pattern lottery is performed, and the change in the emission color (change timing and change condition) is controlled according to the lottered notice pattern. To explain the notice pattern lottery more specifically, a notice pattern X in which the emission color change occurs and a notice pattern Y in which the emission color change does not occur are prepared, and a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns in which the player operation input effect is executed are executed. (For example, the fluctuation pattern A with a low expectation degree and a fluctuation time of 15 seconds and the fluctuation pattern B with a high expectation degree and a fluctuation time of 30 seconds) are drawn by lottery for the notice patterns X and Y with different distributions. At this time, by making it easier for the variation pattern B to select the advance notice pattern X than the variation pattern A, in the player operation input effect executed in the middle of the main effect based on the highly expected variation pattern B, the emission color is changed. It is possible to make changes easy to occur. The fluctuation patterns A and B described above are not limited to those having different fluctuation times, and may have different reach types. Further, with respect to the notice patterns to be drawn, a plurality of types of notice patterns X1 to X3 may be prepared in which the number of operations for which the emission color change occurs is different.

The notice pattern lottery regarding the change in emission color as described above is not limited to the player operation input effect of repeated hits, and the player operation input effect by other operation modes such as single press and long press. It can also be applied to the change in emission color (change in upgrade of emission color) in.

<Player operation input effect (long press)>
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a long-pressed player operation input effect. The long-pressed player operation input effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 81.

First, it is suggested and notified that the introduction effect is started during the introduction effect period, and that a long press input operation for the effect button 3j is required. As a specific effect mode, for example, the seg effect display device 74 first uses the seg 741b, 741c to display the character string "PUSH" in purple or red (see also FIG. 77 (A)). In this example, the purple seg display suggests that it is a player operation input effect of the "long press" operation, and the red seg display suggests a high degree of expectation. In the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, the emission color of the seg display is changed to a specific color (for example, red) in order to suggest that the effect is a high expectation effect at each stage as the effect progresses. Can be done. However, in the initial stage of the introduction effect, in order to clarify that the type of input operation required for the player operation input effect is "long press", be sure to display it in purple corresponding to the "long press" operation. You may do it.

Next, the seg effect display device 74 performs a seg display that counts down in the order of "3", "2", and "1" in purple or red. At this time, the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (jingle) and then outputs a voice "prepared". In addition, in order to prevent the downgrade change of the emission color in the seg display, if the red seg display is performed at the previous "PUSH" stage, the countdown seg display may also be restricted to be red. Good. Such measures to prevent downgrades are the same at other stages described later.

Then, when the end of the introduction effect period is approaching, the seg effect display device 74 displays the character strings in the order of "PU", "---", and "SH" in purple or red in the order of "PU", "---", and "SH" to display the length of the effect button 3j. Notifies the start of pressing. At this time, the speaker 11 also notifies by voice that the operation of pushing (pushing) is performed for a long time by outputting a voice that sandwiches a long sound like "Push!".

It should be noted that the effect mode of the introduction effect shown in FIG. 81 is only an example. As another effect mode, for example, in the introduction effect, the character string of "Pb" may be displayed in a segment instead of "PUSH". Further, the countdown of "3" to "1" may not be displayed as a segment. Further, as an effect mode for further emphasizing the long press, the character strings of "Long" (see FIG. 76 (B)) and "PUSH" may be displayed in a segment. Further, as another effect mode in which the long press is emphasized, it is conceivable to display the character strings of "PUSH" and "Hold" in a segment. Further, as for the effect mode of the sound output by the speaker 11, a dedicated sound source may be used because it is often a special effect when a long press input operation is required.

When the introduction effect period in which the introduction effect is executed ends, the period shifts to the input valid notification period and the effective time display effect is started. As shown in FIG. 81, the control state of the operation reception control is switched from the "invalid period" to the "valid period" at the timing of shifting from the introduction effect period to the input valid notification period. ..

In the effective time display effect, the seg effect display device 74 performs an effect of notifying that the operation effective time decreases with the passage of time. Specifically, for example, the outer circumference countdown display (see FIG. 77 (C)) is performed with a blue or red emission color, as in the effective time display effect in the player operation input effect of repeated hits shown in FIG. 79.

Here, in the long-pressed player operation input effect, the player continues to press the effect button 3j during the input valid notification period (operation valid period). At this time, as shown in FIG. 81, while the effect button 3j is being pressed, the seg display of the outer circumference countdown is temporarily turned off, and then the segs 741a to 741c are displayed according to the passage of time during which the pressing operation continues. The LEDs light up in sequence. Further, when the pressing operation of the effect button 3j continues even after the LEDs of the segs 741a to 741c are sequentially lit and all are lit, the seg effect display device 74 changes the emission color of all the LEDs stepwise. As a specific color change, for example, a color change that a general player imagines to improve expectations, such as white, blue, yellow, green, and red, is adopted, and depending on the final emission color, Suggests expectations for successful results. The rainbow color, which suggests the confirmation of the success result, may be adopted as the emission color. Further, although the speaker 11 outputs a predetermined sound effect (SE), it is also preferable that the volume and scale are changed according to the passage of time during which the pressing operation continues.

The lighting change (temporary extinguishing-sequential lighting-sequential color change) of the segments 741a to 741c in the above-mentioned long-pressed player operation input effect was determined by the effect control board 200 determining the number of presses during the long-press operation. This is realized by controlling the lighting of the segments 741a to 741c based on the number of times of pressing. Explaining in detail the method of determining the number of presses during the long press operation, the device management process of the main loop process executed by the effect control board 200 when the effect button 3j is pressed during the operation valid period (step S820 in FIG. 55). ) Is easy to synchronize with the lamp control (16 ms in this embodiment), the number of presses is counted as one in the main loop processing and the interrupt processing. Then, the effect control board 200 is sequentially turned on until the number of times of pressing a predetermined number of times (for example, the 30th time) is continuously counted, and is controlled so as to be fully turned on in about 0.5 seconds. When the number of presses is counted, the color of the emitted color is gradually changed based on the determination of the number of presses until another predetermined number of presses (for example, 50th, 80th, etc.) is counted. Control. The interrupt cycle (1 ms in the present embodiment) of the effect control board 200 may be used for the count cycle of the number of presses.

In this way, in the effective time display effect, the effect mode of the seg display (or sound output) is changed by continuing the long press operation, so that the maintenance of the long press operation can be promoted while enhancing the interest of the player. It should be noted that the countdown proceeds in the background even during the change of the effect mode during the long press operation of the effect button 3j, and the long press operation of the effect button 3j is canceled before the transition condition to the effect period after the operation is satisfied. The outer circumference countdown display is restarted, and the remaining counts are displayed in seg. In the figure, the process at the time of re-operation when the operation is canceled in the middle is expressed by redoing from the sequential lighting (first process), but when the color change is reached sequentially, at the time of canceling the operation. Instead of shifting to the countdown, the display of the canceled timing may be used as the takeover display, and it may be determined whether or not the mode changes to the subsequent mode when the operation is restarted.

Further, as another effect mode of the effective time display effect, a seg display similar to the continuous hit challenge (FIG. 80) shown in the player operation input effect of the continuous hit can be performed. In this case, the countdown display may be performed by the validity period display by the seg 741a and 741b, and the result based on the long press operation may be displayed by the result display by the seg 741c. The seg change of the result display may be performed according to the pressing time during which the long press operation is performed, but the difference from FIG. 80 is that the result display starts from the off state and is directed toward full lighting (success). It is preferable to change the lighting so that the number of lights gradually increases.

In addition, in FIG. 81, there is a part marked with “*” in the effective time display effect, but this is a predetermined input operation (here, the effect button) as described above with reference to FIG. 79. It means that it is possible to execute a "prompting effect" that urges an input operation when it is determined that the "pressing operation of 3j) has not been performed" at the time of non-operation ". Since it will be repeated, a detailed explanation of the reminder effect will be omitted.

In the long-pressed player operation input effect, the effective time display effect is continued until the predetermined operation valid period (input valid notification period) ends. Then, when the effective time display effect (input valid notification period) ends, the operation shifts to the post-operation effect period and the post-operation effect is executed. The control state of the operation reception control is switched from the "valid period" to the "invalid period" at the timing of transition from the input valid notification period to the post-operation effect period.

In the post-operation effect, the result based on the input operation of repeated hits executed during the effective time display effect (input valid notification period) is obtained during the introduction effect or the effective time display effect using the seg effect display device 74 or the speaker 11. Is displayed in a different manner from. The specific mode of production is the same as that in FIG. 79 and the like, and the description thereof will be omitted. The result displayed in the post-operation effect may be determined in advance at the start of the player operation input effect, or when a success or failure is drawn at the time of execution of the input operation, the lottery result is used. May be good.

<Player operation input production (pulling)>
The player operation input effect of attraction will be described. As described above, the pulling means an input operation (pulling operation) for the second effect button 3k having a lever structure. In general, the input operation for the second effect button 3k is completed by performing one pulling operation during the operation valid period, and when the operation target is replaced with the effect button 3j, the effect is produced. A player operation input effect can be realized in an effect mode similar to a single press on the button 3j. More specifically, as the attracting player operation input effect, the single-shot player operation input effect illustrated in FIGS. 75 and 78 can be diverted for the effect period and the transition of the operation reception control.

In the following, the production transition of the attracting player operation input effect will be described. First, as in FIG. 75, the introduction effect is started during the introduction effect period, and at this time, the control state of the operation reception control is set to the “invalid period”. In the introduction effect of attraction, the seg effect display device 74 uses the seg 741b, 741c to indicate a character string (for example, "PULL" shown in FIG. 77 (B)) indicating an attraction operation with respect to the second effect button 3k. ) Is displayed in a segment. In accordance with this seg display, in the sound output by the speaker 11, a predetermined sound effect (jingle) is output, and then a sound such as "Lever ready ... Close!" Is output to pull the second effect button 3k. It may be emphasized that the approaching operation is required. It is preferable that the display timing of "Close!" Is immediately before the start of the input valid notification period at the end of the introduction production period.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second effect button 3k may be configured so that the pulling operation becomes effective after a predetermined preparatory operation. Specifically, for example, a lever-shaped second effect button 3k called a "drive gear" is normally fixed in a standby position, and at the time of operation, it is operated after the fixing is released and the button rises to a predetermined operating position. It is assumed that the lever operation (pulling operation) that tilts toward you can be executed during the valid period. In the case of such a structure, as another example of the seg display in the introduction effect, the character string of "deg" indicating the initials of the "drive gear" is first displayed in the seg, and the operation valid period shifts to the lever operation. The character string "PULL" may be displayed before. Further, the speaker 11 may output a voice such as "Lever is being prepared" during the "dg" seg display, and may output a voice such as "Close!" When the "PULL" seg display is displayed. ..

Further, the seg display of "PULL" and "DG" in the introduction effect of the attraction is from the light emission of a specific color (for example, orange) suggesting that it is the player operation input effect of the attraction operation of the second effect button 3k. By starting it, it can be distinguished from other operation types. However, considering that the second effect button 3k is a more prominent effect button than the effect button 3j, it does not emit a specific color that can distinguish the operation type, but emits light in red, which suggests a high degree of expectation. It may be.

When the introduction effect in the introduction effect period ends, the period shifts to the input valid notification period, and the effective time display effect starts. Here, the control state of the operation reception control is the same as in the case of the single push as shown in FIG. 75 or the like, at least by the time when the input valid notification period is entered and the effective time display effect is started, the second effect button is displayed. It is switched to the "valid period" in which the 3k input operation is valid. As in the case of single push, from the end of the introduction production period, considering the case where the player immediately performs the input operation in response to the seg display of "PULL" and the sound output of "close" in the introduction production. , The control state may be switched to the valid period.

The effective time display effect in the attracting player operation input effect is the effective time displayed in FIGS. 75, 78, etc. after replacing the seg display of "PUSH" and "Pb" with "PULL" and "deg". It can be realized by combining the effect mode in the display effect. Details will be omitted as they will be repeated.

In addition, when trying to perform an effective time display effect peculiar to the pulling operation, for example, using the segments 741b and 741c, "PU", "LL", "--- (upper / upper)", "--- The seg display of "(middle / middle)" and "--- (bottom / bottom)" may be repeatedly displayed. At this time, the operation type of pulling operation is notified by the seg display of "PULL", and the dynamic image of pushing down the lever of the second effect button 3k is presented by the seg display in which "---" moves from the upper row to the lower row. To.

Further, in the repetition of the seg display, the emission color of the seg display may be gradually changed with the passage of time (for example, according to the number of repetitions) in the same manner as described above with a single push. Specifically, for example, in the effective time display effect, a series of "PU", "LL", "--- (upper / upper)", "--- (middle / middle)", and "--- (lower / lower)". If the seg display is repeated four times and the emission color of each time is changed in the order of red, green, yellow, and blue, it makes the expectation gradually decrease with the passage of time. Can be done. By performing such a color change, the player is urged to promptly execute the input operation for the second effect button 3k, which has a high degree of expectation, and the execution opportunity is being lost over time (the operation validity period is being lost). It can be suggested that there is little left). In addition, since the degree of expectation does not actually change with the passage of time, for the purpose of not disappointing the player whose input operation is delayed, a color having a low degree of relevance to the degree of expectation suggestion or a degree of expectation The emission color may be changed in an order that is difficult to associate with improvement / decrease.

Then, when the pulling operation of the second effect button 3k is performed in the effective time display effect, or when the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, the input valid notification period is shifted to the post-operation effect period, and the post-operation effect is performed. Is started. The effect mode of the post-operation effect can be realized in the same manner as the post-operation effect in the single-shot player operation input effect, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, when the input valid notification period shifts to the post-operation effect period, the control state of the operation reception control is switched from the "valid period" to the "invalid period", and thereafter, at least until the player operation input effect is completed. The input operation of the second effect button 3k is invalid. As described above, when the second effect button 3k is in the working position, the operation of returning to the standby position may be performed after switching to the "invalid period".

As described above, the effect control board 200 can execute the player operation input effect of attracting the second effect button 3k in an effect mode that can be distinguished from other operation types.

In the above description, the player operation input effect of pulling similar to the single push has been described, but in the present embodiment, the player operation input effect by other operation types of the pulling operation, specifically, the second effect To the player operation input effect corresponding to "pulling repeated hits" that requires the button 3k to be pulled multiple times, and "pulling and holding" that requires the operation to keep the second effect button 3k pulled. The application is not excluded. Although detailed description is omitted, in the case of the player operation input effect of "pulling continuous hitting", the operation for the second effect button 3k is performed in accordance with the above-mentioned continuous hitting player operation input effect with reference to FIG. 79. The required effect mode may be configured, and in the case of the player operation input effect of "pulling and holding", the second effect button is based on the above-mentioned long-pressed player operation input effect with reference to FIG. 81. An effect mode that requires an operation for 3k may be configured.

<Player operation input production (automatic repeated hits)>
A player operation input effect of automatic continuous hitting will be described. As described above, the automatic continuous striking is an operation valid period when the automatic continuous striking function that the pachinko machine 1 can have is enabled (ON) by a customization function that can be set by the player or as a specification of the gaming machine. It means an operation in which the effect button 3j is continuously pressed. At this time, while the pressing operation of the effect button 3j continues, it is considered that the same input operation as the repeated pressing of the effect button 3j is performed, and the input information corresponding to one input operation is predetermined. It is repeatedly transmitted to the effect control board 200 at intervals.

Then, in general, in a situation where the automatic continuous striking of the effect button 3j is effectively accepted, the continuous striking operation of the effect button 3j by the player is also effectively accepted. Therefore, the player operation input effect of the automatic continuous striking can be realized in the same effect mode as the player operation input effect of the continuous striking described above with reference to FIG. 79 and the like, except for the mode of pressing the effect button 3j by the player. Yes, detailed description is omitted.

In addition, when it is desired to execute the player operation input effect of the continuous hit while clearly indicating that the automatic continuous hit is effective, in the introduction effect, a specific color suggesting that it is the player operation input effect of the "continuous hit" operation ( Instead of the seg display (green in this example), the seg display by another light emitting mode (for example, the seg that alternately emits green and purple) suggesting that it is a player operation input effect that allows the "automatic continuous hit" operation. Display) may be performed.

<Player operation input effect (automatic operation)>
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of a player operation input effect of a single push when the automatic operation is enabled. In FIG. 82, the player operation input effect (normal pattern) of a single push when the automatic operation function is disabled (when the automatic operation is disabled) illustrated in FIG. 75 is set to enable the automatic operation function. This is an example of how the effect is executed when the automatic operation is enabled (when the automatic operation is enabled). Hereinafter, by referring to FIG. 82 while comparing with FIG. 75, the features of the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is enabled will be described in detail.

First, as with the other player operation input effects when the automatic operation is disabled described so far, the introduction effect is started during the introduction effect period. As can be seen by comparing with FIG. 75, among the effect modes of the introduction effect, the seg display may be the same as when the automatic operation is disabled, and the emission color thereof is white corresponding to the "single push" operation. Regarding the sound output, since it is not necessary to request the player to input the effect button when the automatic operation is enabled, in the case of FIG. 82, no special sound output is performed. However, this is just an example, and the same sound output as when the automatic operation is disabled (in the case of FIG. 75, the voice output of "press" after the jingle) may be used, or the sound output for notifying that the automatic operation is valid. (For example, audio output such as "preparing for automatic operation") may be performed.

Further, the control state of the operation reception control is controlled in the same manner as when the automatic operation is disabled. That is, at the start of the introduction effect, it is set as an "invalid period", and at least, it is switched to the "valid period" until the transition from the introduction effect period to the input valid notification period. In the case of FIG. 82, since FIG. 75 is used as a reference, the "valid period" is switched to the "valid period" at the preceding timing, not at the same time as the timing of shifting to the input valid notification period. In this way, by controlling the operation reception control in the same manner as when the automatic operation is disabled, it is not necessary to increase the control pattern by the effect control board 200.

Next, when the input valid notification period shifts, the valid time display effect is started. The effect mode of the effective time display effect may be the same effect mode as when the automatic operation is disabled (see FIG. 75), but FIG. 82 shows an example of the effect mode peculiar to the automatic operation when the automatic operation is enabled in the effective time display effect. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the effective time display effect, a seg display of the outer circumference countdown is performed with a blue emission color. Since no operation by the player is required, the seg display as in "Pb" in FIG. 75 is not performed. The transition of the seg display in the outer circumference countdown may be the same as in the example of FIG. 77 (C), but as a feature when the automatic operation is enabled, the time until the automatic operation (deemed operation) is performed instead of the operation valid period is counted down. indicate. Specifically, the time value until the automatic operation is performed may be displayed as a countdown, or the count "0" may be displayed at the execution timing of the automatic operation while making it appear that the countdown is displayed for the operation valid period. The countdown speed may be increased so as to become. Then, at the timing of the automatic operation (deemed operation), it is preferable to display the seg in red different from the countdown display (the display content is arbitrary, for example, all the LEDs of the seg 741a to 741c are turned on). It is suggested that the process corresponding to the input operation (single press of the effect button 3k in this example) is automatically executed. Further, as another example, in order to suggest the timing at which the automatic operation (deemed operation) is performed, a method of displaying 1 LED of the outer peripheral LEDs of the segments 741a to 741c in red in advance can be considered.

In the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is enabled, the player does not need to operate the effect button. Therefore, it is necessary to execute the above-mentioned "prompt effect" for the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is disabled. Absent.

Then, since it is considered that the input operation of the single push is performed by executing the deemed operation, the input condition related to the input operation is satisfied. Therefore, the input valid notification period ends, the operation shifts to the post-operation effect period, and the post-operation effect starts. At this time, the control state of the operation reception control is switched from the "valid period" to the "invalid period", and thereafter, the input operation of the effect button 3j is invalidated at least until the player operation input effect is completed.

In the post-operation effect, the result based on the automatic operation (deemed operation) is displayed in a mode different from that at the time of the introduction effect or the effective time display effect by using the seg effect display device 74 and the speaker 11. In the case of FIG. 82, as in the case of FIG. 75, the effect mode of the post-operation effect is the same as in the case of FIG. 75, in which the character string “good” is displayed in blue in the case of the success result together with the predetermined sound effect (SE), and the failure result. In the case of, the character string "---" is displayed as a segment.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the automatic operation function is effectively set, a predetermined input operation for the operation button by the player during the operation valid period (in this example, the effect button 3j). When the single-shot pressing of the above is performed, the effect control board 200 may effectively accept the input operation as in the case where the automatic operation is not set. In such a case, the effect control board 200 performs the effect control corresponding to the time when the automatic operation is not set until the result display (post-operation effect) of the current player operation input effect is completed, triggered by the input operation. Then, how to set (enable / disable) the automatic operation function after the post-operation effect is completed depends on the specifications. Even if the automatic operation function is enabled by such control, when the player wants to perform an input operation by himself / herself for a specific player operation input effect, the input operation by the player is performed. Since the production can be prioritized, it can be expected to improve the satisfaction of the player.

However, even if an input operation is performed by the player during the operation valid period when the automatic operation function is enabled and a post-operation effect based on the input operation is performed, the subsequent automatic operation function setting is performed. How to set (valid / invalid) follows the specifications of the game machine.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display device for displaying the variation of the decorative symbol or the effect display, the automatic operation function is set even during the variation display of the symbol. Since it is easy to notify the change on the liquid crystal screen, the effect control board 200 automatically operates the operation buttons when the player operates the operation buttons when the automatic operation function is enabled. The enable setting of the operation function may be canceled (automatic operation is disabled), and a notification to that effect may be displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 does not include the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display device for displaying the variation of the decorative pattern or the effect display, for example, the pachinko machine 1 includes the drum type effect display device 71. , It is not easy to notify about the change of the setting of the automatic operation function during the variable display of the symbol. Therefore, in the case of such a configuration, when the automatic operation function is enabled, during the variable display of the symbol (including the operation valid period, but excluding "special variable display" described later). Even if the operation button is operated by the player, the setting of the automatic operation function is not changed (however, as described above, it is possible to effectively accept the input operation performed during the operation valid period and proceed with the production process. ) Is preferable.

Further, the operation of changing the setting of the automatic operation function when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not include the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display device for displaying the variation of the decorative symbol or the effect display will be supplemented. As an operation method for switching between "enabled" and "disabled" settings of the automatic operation function in such a pachinko machine 1, for example, the following operation method can be specified. First, when a long press operation of the effect button 3j (for example, a press operation of 3 seconds or longer) is executed while the game is waiting (during the demo screen display), the setting of the automatic operation function may be switched. In addition, as an example corresponding to the "special fluctuation display" shown in the previous section, some fluctuation patterns (for example, a loss fluctuation that does not develop into a reach effect and a loss variation that does not cause a fanning effect. So-called do-loss variation). The setting of the automatic operation function may be switched when a long-pressing operation of the effect button 3j (for example, a pressing operation of 3 seconds or more) is executed during the symbol variation of. Further, as another example corresponding to the "special fluctuation display" shown in the previous stage, the symbol is changing other than during the execution of the player operation input effect that requires the operation of the effect button 3j and the second effect button 3k, or The setting of the automatic operation function may be switched when a long press operation of the effect button 3j (for example, a press operation for 3 seconds or longer) is executed during a symbol change other than the execution of the reach effect. Moreover, each specification mentioned above may be combined. By adopting the above specifications, even if the pachinko machine 1 does not have the liquid crystal display device 70 as a display for displaying the variation of the decorative pattern or the effect display, the player may be confused with other effect displays or the like. It is possible to switch the setting of the automatic operation function in a difficult manner.

Further, the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is enabled has been described so far with reference to FIG. 82, but in the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, the effect peculiar to the automatic operation valid time display effect in the effective time display effect. The aspect is not limited to the effect aspect illustrated in FIG. 82. In addition, for example, when the timing of the deemed operation is reached with the count "0", the brightness of the LED is gradually reduced without blinking the seg display (for example, "0"), and finally the LED is turned off (fade out). ) May be done.

Further, for example, in the effective time display effect when the automatic operation is enabled, the emission color of the seg display is sequentially displayed in the countdown display, as in the case of the effective time display effect of the single push described with reference to FIG. 75. You may change it. In this case, it is suggested that the automatic operation is executed by turning off the seg display when the timing of the automatic operation arrives in the middle of the color change.

As described above, the effect mode of the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is enabled has been described in detail while comparing with the game mode in the player operation input effect when the automatic operation is disabled. Here, in the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment, whether or not the effect mode can be shared between when the automatic operation is enabled and when the automatic operation is disabled can be summarized as follows.

First, in the introduction effect (especially in the seg display), the effect mode may be standardized when the automatic operation is enabled and when the automatic operation is disabled. This is not limited to the case where the operation type of the input operation is "single press", and the same applies to other operation types, that is, "continuous hit", "long press", or "pull".

Next, in the effective time display effect, in the case of a single push, the effect mode may be common when the automatic operation is enabled and when the automatic operation is disabled, or may be a unique effect mode when the automatic operation is enabled. On the other hand, when the operation type is "continuous hit" or "long press", it does not mean that a unique effect mode appears when the automatic operation is enabled in the effective time display effect, so that the effect mode is the same as when the automatic operation is disabled. It should be carried out at. In the case of "pulling", any may be used.

Then, in the post-operation effect, regardless of the operation type of the input operation, it may be a common effect mode when the automatic operation is enabled and when the automatic operation is disabled, and it is possible to distinguish between the automatic operation enabled and the automatic operation enabled. It may be. As a specific production mode that can be distinguished, for example, when the automatic operation is enabled, the volume of the sound effect (SE) is made lower than when the automatic operation is disabled, and the result display (for example, the seg display of "good") is not performed. You can do it. However, when the result display by the player operation input effect raises the expectation of the player, it is preferable to display the result even if it is an automatic operation (in other words, if it is a failure result, the result display is intentionally displayed. You don't have to).

<Summary of player operation input production>
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, depending on the operation type of the input operation for the effect operation means (effect input device: effect button 3j, second effect button 3k) that can be operated by the player. , The effect control board 200 notifies the input operation required by the introduction effect, notifies the effective operation period during which the input operation is effective by the effective time display effect, and notifies the result display based on the input operation by the post-operation effect. Thereby, the player operation input effect can be realized.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player operation input effect can be realized by using a predetermined light emitting effect device (for example, a seg effect display device 74), so that the liquid crystal display device 70 can be used. It is possible to notify the operation validity period of the operation means for production in a manner that the player can easily recognize without using the dynamic image display means.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 75 to 82 and the derivative examples described accordingly, the effect control board 200 inputs the player operation input effect. During the effective notification period, by causing the light emitting effect device (Seg effect display device 74) to execute a light emitting effect according to the effect pattern of the player operation input effect, during the operation valid period of the effect input device (for example, the effect button 3j). Not only whether or not it is, but also various information such as the degree of expectation of the effect and the remaining period of the operation valid period can be notified.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 75 and 78, the effect control board 200 is a light emitting effect device (light emitting effect device) during the input valid notification period of the player operation input effect. The light emitting effect by the seg effect display device 74) is either a normal mode (normal pattern) or a chance mode (chance pattern) indicating that the player is more likely to be given a profit than the normal mode. By being feasible in, it is possible to bring out a production mode based on the degree of expectation, and it can be expected to have an effect of enhancing the interest of the game.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 82 and the like for the player operation input effect for each operation type, the player operation input effect according to the present embodiment includes a predetermined input condition (result display in the post-operation effect). There are a plurality of effect patterns having different operation modes (for example, single press, continuous press, long press, etc. for the effect button 3j) for the effect input device for satisfying the input condition for performing the effect. Then, the effect control board 200 performs a seg display in a light emitting color that can distinguish the operation type, and the player operation input effect is performed during the input valid notification period of the player operation input effect in a different effect mode for each effect pattern. By causing the light emitting effect device (Seg effect display device 74) to execute the light emitting effect according to the effect pattern of the above, the player who sees the light emitting effect device can easily identify the operation type of the required input operation. Thus, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is configured to include the drum-type effect display device 71 as a display for displaying the variation of the decorative pattern or the effect display, the pachinko machine 1 operates like the liquid crystal display device 70. It is possible to inform and suggest the input operation required in the player operation input effect in an easy-to-understand manner without using a specific image display means.

Up to this point, regarding the production mode of the player operation input effect, a method of realizing mainly the seg display by the seg effect display device 74 and assisting with the sound output by the speaker 11 has been described, but this embodiment describes the player operation. The effect control board 200 other than the effect display device (liquid crystal display device 70 or drum type effect display device 71) that displays a variable display of decorative symbols in place of the seg effect display device 74 for a part or all of the effect display by the input effect. It may be realized by applying it to "another light emitting device" whose lighting is controlled by.

Specific candidates for other light emitting devices include, first, a frame lamp 10 or a panel lamp 25 whose lighting is controlled by the lamp effect control means 230 of the effect control board 200. In the case of the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25, a part or all of the above-mentioned effect display is expressed by using the lighting control thereof. Further, as another candidate, a light emitting device such as a lamp provided near or inside the effect button 3j (or the second effect button 3k) (for example, an LED inside the effect button, an expectation degree display LED76, or an addition to these). It may be a light guide plate provided or the like). For example, when the expectation degree display LED 76 is composed of a full-color LED, a part or all of the effect display can be expressed by the lighting control thereof like the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 described above. Further, when the expectation degree display LED 76 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (mini liquid crystal), an input operation of the effect button 3j is requested by displaying a button image imitating the effect button 3j on the liquid crystal display screen. Is possible.

In the present embodiment, even when the player operation input effect is realized by using the above-mentioned "other light emitting device", the same effect as the player operation input effect using the seg effect display device 74 described above is obtained. You can expect that. For example, it can be expected that the operation validity period of the operation means for the effect is notified in a manner that the player can easily recognize without using the image display means by the effect display device that displays the variation of the decorative pattern.

Further, even when displaying with the other lamps described above (for example, a lamp provided on the effect button 3j of the glass frame 3), a light emitting display indicating the effective period is displayed in conjunction with the seg effect display device 74 on the game board. It may be configured to be executed. The interlocking display may have the same light emission color, blinking cycle, etc., and it is possible to identify that the effective period is in a light emission mode similar to the display of the Seg effect display device 74, with only the light emission color being common. It suffices as long as it becomes. In this way, if it is controlled so that the other lamps are interlocked, the display is executed on the other lamps even in a specific situation where the seg effect display device 74 does not (cannot) notify the validity period. It may be possible.

Although the pachinko machine has been described above as an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine. That is, a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine, a gaming machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, or a managed gaming machine that does not require a gaming ball or a gaming medal (enclosed gaming machine, medalless). The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine), a casino machine, or the like.

1: Pachinko machine, 2: Outer frame, 2a-2d: Frame, 2e, 2f: Hinge member, 2p: Door open sensor, 3: Glass frame (door frame), 3a, 3b: Hinge mechanism, 3c: Locking device, 3d: through port, 3e: base unit, 3f: dish unit, 3g: area, 3h: frame lamp (LED lamp), 3i: speaker, 3j: effect button, 3k: second effect button, 4: front frame, 4a : Handle, 4b: Frame, 4c, 4d: Hinge, 4e: Launcher, 4f: Locking unit, 4g: Board unit, 4h: Back cover, 4i, 4j: Hinge member, 4p: Door open detection member, 5 : Game board, 5a: Game area, 5b: Main control unit, 5c: Peripheral control unit, 8: Upper ball plate, 9: Lower ball plate, 10: Direction lamp (frame lamp), 11: Speaker, 12: Launch handle , 13: Ball feed mechanism, 14: Launch mechanism, 15: Production button, 20A: Game area, 22: Center decoration, 25: Production lamp (board lamp), 29: First out port, 31: Storage tank, 34 : Prize ball payout unit, 61: 1st starting port, 62: 2nd starting port, 63: Gate, 64: Large winning opening, 66: General winning opening, 70: LCD display device, 71: Drum type production display device, 72: Light guide plate, 73: Sub effect display device, 74: Seg effect display device, 75: Hold display LED, 76: Expectation level display LED, 77: Claw accessory, 78 (78a, 78b): Small movable accessory, 91: Lamp connection board, 92: Motor driver, 100: Main control board, 100a: Front member, 100b: Game panel, 100c: Function display unit, 100d: Inner rail, 100e: Out guide path, 100f: Outer rail, 100h : Opening, 100m: Table unit, 100n: Main control board case, 100p: Harness cover, 100q: Setting key switch, 101: Main control CPU, 101B: Strobe signal output port, 102: Main control ROM, 103: Main control RAM , 104: I / O port circuit, 109: effect control board connection connector, 110: ball entry determination means, 111: data bus, 112: strobe signal bus, 1 20: Game lottery random number generation means, 123: Ordinary electric accessory solenoid, 124: Special electric accessory solenoid, 130: Hold control means, 131: Special symbol hold control means, 132: Normal symbol hold control means, 135: Preliminary determination Means, 140: Special symbol lottery processing means, 141: Special symbol winning / failing determination means, 142: Special symbol stopping symbol determining means, 143: Special symbol variation pattern determining means, 145: Normal symbol lottery processing means, 146: Normal symbol winning / failing determination Means, 147: Normal symbol stop symbol determination means, 148: Normal symbol variation pattern determination means, 150: Special game control means, 155: Symbol display control means, 156: Special symbol display control means, 157: Normal symbol display control means, 160: Electric accessory control means, 161: 1st start port switch, 162: 2nd start port switch, 163: Operation gate switch, 164: Large winning opening switch, 166: General winning opening switch, 167: Out ball detection switch , 169: Game state control means, 170: Error monitoring control means, 171: 1st special symbol display device, 172: 2nd special symbol display device, 173: 1st special symbol hold lamp, 174: 2nd special symbol hold lamp , 175: Normal symbol display device, 176: Normal figure hold lamp, 180: Main information storage means, 190: Command transmission / reception means, 195: Setting change means, 196: Setting confirmation means, 197: Setting display unit, 200: Production control Board, 200a: Opening, 200m: Back unit, 201: Production control CPU, 202: Production control ROM, 203: Production control RAM, 204: I / O port circuit, 210: Production lottery random number generation means, 220: Production control means , 2221: Effect mode control means, 222: Hold information display control means, 223: Look-ahead notice control means, 224: Decorative symbol determination means, 225: Variable effect determination means, 226: Notice effect determination means, 227: Big hit effect determination means , 230: Lamp effect control means, 240: Character effect control means, 250: Error effect control means, 260: Effect control information storage means, 270: Command transmission / reception means, 300: Image control board, 300 m: Liquid crystal base, 301: Image control CPU, 302: VDP, 303: sound source IC, 304: ROM, 305: RAM, 306: I / O port circuit, 400: Payout control board, 400p: RAM clear switch cover, 400q: RAM clear switch, 401: Payout control CPU, 402: Payout control ROM, 403 : Payout control RAM, 500: Attacker unit, 600: Power supply board, 600p: Power supply switch cover, 600q: Power supply switch, 622: Normal electric accessory, 642: Special electric accessory, 710: Design display area, 711: Reel, 711a: Left reel, 711b: Middle reel, 711c: Right reel, 721 (721a to 721g): Light emitting area, 741a to 741c: Seg, 751 (751a to 751d): First hold display LED, 752 (752a to 752d) : 2nd hold display LED

Claims (1)

The main control means to control the progress of the game,
An effect control means that executes an effect according to the progress of the game by the main control means, and
A light emitting effect device whose lighting is controlled by the effect control means,
A speaker that executes a sound effect controlled by the effect control means,
It is provided with an effect input device for inputting input information to the effect control means based on an input operation by the player.
The effect control means can execute a player operation input effect that can change the effect mode being executed based on the input of the input information by the effect input device.
The effect period of the player operation input effect includes an introduction effect period for prompting the input operation to the effect input device, an input valid notification period for notifying that the input operation to the effect input device is effective, and the above. After the operation of notifying the benefit given to the player in the game executed by the main control means or the degree of expectation to be given the benefit when the input operation to the effect input device satisfies a predetermined input condition. The production period and is included,
The player operation input effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns in which the player's input operation mode for the effect input device is different, which is a condition that can change the effect mode being executed.
The effect control means relates to the effect input device defined as a condition that can change the effect pattern of the player operation input effect during the input valid notification period of the player operation input effect. The light emitting effect device is made to execute the light emitting effect according to the input operation mode of the player .
The player operation input effect is predetermined in accordance with the effect pattern of the player operation input effect even when the player's input operation to the effect input device is not performed during the input valid notification period. An automatic operation that shifts to the post-operation effect period for notifying the profit given to the player in the game executed by the main control means or the degree of expectation that the profit is given based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Functions can be set,
Even when the automatic operation function is enabled in the player operation input effect, a valid period during which the player's input operation to the effect input device is valid is set in the input valid notification period. , The player's input operation mode for the effect input device defined as a condition that the light emitting effect device can change the effect mode being executed in the effect pattern of the player operation input effect during the input valid notification period. Produces light emission according to
When the automatic operation function is enabled in the player operation input effect, the execution mode of the sound effect executed by the speaker during at least either the introduction effect period or the input valid notification period is determined. While configured to be different from the case where the automatic operation function is disabled, the execution mode of the light emission effect executed by the light emission effect device and the sound effect executed by the speaker during the post-operation effect period. Is a gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be common to the case where the automatic operation function is disabled.

Images